JP2020124641A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a degree of attention of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: shooting means for shooting a game ball to a game area formed on a game board; start ball entry means for the entry of a game ball falling down in the game area, which executes an internal lottery in the entry of a game ball; and game state transition means for transitioning a game state on the basis of a result of the internal lottery. The game state includes a low frequency support mode having game modes of a normal mode and a special mode, and a high frequency support mode which is more advantageous for a player than the low frequency support mode. The game state transition means transitions the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode on the basis of the result of the internal lottery in the normal mode of the low frequency support mode, and in the high frequency support mode, and transitions the game state to the high frequency support mode irrespective of the result of the internal lottery in the special mode of the low frequency support mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launch means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area, and a starting ball entering means for executing an internal lottery at the time of entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

JP, 2011-235036, A

However, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, the player has to play in the first game state, which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be immediately stopped.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention enters a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area, and executes an internal lottery when entering the game ball. 1. A game machine having a starting ball entering means and a state transfer means capable of transferring a state in a game based on a result of an internal lottery, the state being a first state having a normal mode and a special mode. And a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the state transition means is usually based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting entry means. In the normal mode and the second state of the first state, the means for transitioning to either the mode or the special mode, and to the one of the first state and the second state based on the result of the internal lottery. Means and means for shifting to the second state regardless of the result of the internal lottery in the special mode of the first state are provided.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention Front view of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Figure showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Figure showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the electric power winning/disapproving table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which wins electric power releasing. The figure which shows the winning/losing table which stores the value of the random number which wins the winning occurrence The figure which shows the distribution table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the type of hit. Diagram showing the flow chart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the prize winning processing for the working mouth Diagram showing the flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing the flow chart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of game time control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of data setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of game state transition processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the special winning opening opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the special winning opening opening processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. The figure which shows the flowchart of the variable entrance execution processing. The figure which shows the flowchart of fluctuation end processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production for opening/closing execution modes. Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status The figure which shows the production for the game turn when the game ball wins the lower working opening triggered by the win to the through gate in the high frequency support mode Enlarged view showing the area around the right variable ball entry mechanism The figure which shows the production for opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins in the right entrance (V winning) Figure showing the effect of game diversion when staying in special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of the completion of the opening/closing execution mode which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production for opening/closing execution modes. Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status The figure which shows the production for opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins in the right entrance (V winning) Figure showing the effect of game diversion when staying in special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of fluctuation end processing The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production for opening/closing execution modes. Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status The figure which shows the production for opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins in the right entrance (V winning) Figure showing the effect of game diversion when staying in special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game number counter setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production for opening/closing execution modes. Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status The figure which shows the production for opening and closing execution mode when the game ball wins in the right entrance (V winning) The figure which shows the production for the game turn when the game ball wins the lower working opening triggered by the win to the through gate in the high frequency support mode

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (on the front side). 12 and.

The gaming machine main body 12 is disposed in front of the inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right sides being the support side, and the left and right sides are arranged. A front door frame 13 supported by an inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the parts as a support side and a rear door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and having one of left and right side parts as a support side. And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be pivotable.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame. Have These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be colorless and transparent.
Further, the front door frame 13 is provided with a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of a light emitting means configured by various lamp portions provided around the window portion 21, and the display lamp portion. 23 are provided on both left and right sides, and are provided with a speaker portion 24 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulge portion 25 and a lower bulge portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and are both provided so as to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a that is provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b that receives information input by being operated by the player. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a row, toward the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5) side. It has a function to guide. The push button 25b functions as an operation unit that executes an expected effect that causes the player to expect that the player may change the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. This firing handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to fire a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity, that is, the momentum of firing, of the game ball that is fired toward the game area, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The above-mentioned game area is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. This game area can be viewed from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed such that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31, a general winning opening 35 provided in each opening, an upper working opening (first starting ball entering section) 36, a lower working opening (second starting ball entering section) 37, a variable winning device 38, And an outlet 39. In addition, the game board 31 is provided on the right side variable ball entering mechanism 40 provided above the variable winning device 38, two through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and on the right side of the central portion, and on the upper right side. The main display device 42 and the variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion are included. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 implanted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling directions of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper working opening 36, the lower working opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 50a to 50d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 50a to 50d are provided on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 50a, the upper working opening 36 includes a detection sensor 50b, the lower working opening 37 includes a detection sensor 50c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detection sensor 50d. Equipped with. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50d. The detection sensors 50a to 50d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball has entered the general winning opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and a ball enters the lower working port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball has entered the variable winning device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The outlet 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through this out opening 39. Further, the outlet 39 is provided with a detection sensor 50e (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 50e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the outlet 39, unlike when a ball enters each prize hole.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 50f (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and executes an internal lottery when the entry of the game ball occurs. The detection sensor 50f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters each through-gate 41, unlike when a ball enters each prize hole.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and it is not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the entry of the game ball into the outlet 39, the entry of the game ball into the various winning openings is also referred to as a prize. Further, the entry into the through gate 41 means to continue flowing down in the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a prize like the entry into various winning openings.

The upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is opened upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. Are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The lower working port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) configured by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b to be set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a close to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface portion of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than that of one game ball. When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation port 36 becomes wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower working port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can win the lower working port 37 when set to the open state. it can.

It should be noted that the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult to win a game ball in the lower working port 37 (a state in which a game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), instead of the closed state and the open state described above. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a state in which a game ball is easily won in the operating port 37 is switched. Further, the lower working port 37 may be configured such that such switching is not performed by setting the electric accessory 37a, but is performed by displacing the lower working port 37. In such a configuration, the lower working port 37 is configured. 37 does not have to include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a big winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, an opening/closing door 38b for opening and closing the big winning opening 38a, and an opening/closing door 38b. The variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
The player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side on which the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side, it is possible to guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38, the right variable ball entering mechanism 40, the lower working port 37, etc. while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right hitting route). ).

In addition, the player hits the left with the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 27 as a medium amount, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side of the game area. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, etc. (left striking route).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game area is a first path (left) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and to prevent the game ball from entering the lower working opening 37. A hitting route) and a second route (a right hitting route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the lower working port 37 and does not easily cause a game ball to enter the upper working port 36. ..

Here, the game board 31 is provided with a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front surface side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided with a transparent panel 381a that is transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 38 can be viewed from the front side, and is provided around the transparent panel 381a and is opaque. And a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21.

The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 50d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and projects from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and retracting toward the inside of the game board 31. By being buried in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the open/close door 38b to set the open/close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which gaming balls cannot win. Then, in the internal lottery, when the player shifts to the open/close execution mode and shifts to the open/close execution mode, the open/close door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open/close door 38b is set in an open state to allow a game ball to enter the special winning opening 38a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 guides a game ball flowing down the game area into the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 by the guidance section 401. A guide passage 402 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of the, a switching unit 403 for switching the destination of the game ball guided in the guide passage 402, and a right entrance 404 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 402. And a left entrance 405.

The guide portion 401 is a blade member 401a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and a blade member centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 401b that rotatably supports 401a and a blade member driving unit 401c that drives the blade member 401a are provided.

The blade member 401a rotates counterclockwise about the pin 401b to close the inlet of the right variable ball entrance mechanism 40 (one-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates clockwise about the pin 401b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) that opens the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by moving. In the open state, the blade member 401a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40.
The blade member driving unit 401c drives the blade member 401a to set the blade member 401a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball travels through the blade member 401a using the inclination of the blade member 401a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Yes (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (one-dot chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 402 is formed in a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. In addition, the guide passage 402 is bifurcated in the middle, and has an upstream guide passage 402a located upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 402b and 402c located downstream. ..

The upstream guide passage 402a guides the game ball guided to the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by the guide portion 401 from the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 to the branch position of the guide passage 402. The upstream guide passage 402a is inclined so as to descend from the inlet of the right variable ball entrance mechanism 40 toward the branch position of the guide passage 402. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a by utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 402a.

The downstream guide passage 402b is provided at a position near the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream side guide passage 402b is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. The downstream guide passage 402b guides the game ball, which has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a, to the right entrance 404.
The downstream guide passage 402c is provided at a position far from the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream side guide passage 402c is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. This downstream guide passage 402c guides the game ball, which has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a, to the left entrance 405.

The switching unit 403 rotatably supports the plate 403a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b and the plate 403a about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 403b and a plate driving unit 403c that drives the plate 403a are provided.

The plate 403a rotates clockwise about the pin 403b to close the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b (two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates counterclockwise about the pin 403b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b is opened (open line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 403a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 402c side.
The plate driving unit 403c drives the plate 403a to set the plate 403a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the plate driving unit 403c sets the plate 403a to the open state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 is guided to the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b, and then the right entrance port. Enter ball 404 (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the plate driving unit 403c sets the plate 403a in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 uses the inclination of the plate 403a to travel down the plate 403a and travel downstream. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 402c, it enters the left entrance 405 (two-dot chain line in the figure).

The right entrance 404 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being processed with a router. The right entrance 404 is equipped with a detection sensor 50g for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of a prize ball when a ball enters the right ball entrance 404, unlike when a ball enters the various prize holes.

The left entrance 405 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The game ball that has entered the left entrance 405 joins the game ball that has passed through the above-mentioned exit 39, and is discharged from the game area. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the left ball entrance 405, unlike when a ball enters the various prize holes.

Since the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right entrance 404, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes in the downstream guide passage 402b that guides the game ball to the right entrance 404. The letter "V" which means to shift to the mode is displayed.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the open/close execution mode when a ball enters the left ball entrance 405, so the downstream guide path 402c that guides the game ball to the left ball entrance 405, The character "x", which means that the mode does not shift to the open/close execution mode, is displayed.

Here, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are normally set in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, when winning the transition to the variable ball entry execution mode, and transitioning to the variable ball entry execution mode, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are set to an open state in which a game ball can win.
Note that the variable ball entry execution mode is to set the blade member 401a to the open state, allow the game ball to enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40, and set the plate 403a to the open state or the closed state. It refers to a mode in which a game ball can be entered into either the entrance 404 or the left entrance 405. In the variable ball entry execution mode, the time (open period) after the plate 403a is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again is set to the closed state after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. It is shorter than the time (open period). Specifically, the opening period of the plate 403a is about 1/10 of the opening period of the blade member 401a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 has a main display part 45 and a character product display part 46, and a segment display or a dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting parts are arranged in a predetermined mode. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is smaller than that for one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display section 45 includes a first result display section 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, and an internal result performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is set (or the opening/closing execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working opening 36 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the winning of the upper working opening 36 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a result of the stop of the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the variable ball entry execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the variable ball entry execution mode. Further, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right entrance port 404.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37 function as starting ball entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when entering the game ball. To do.

The accessory display unit 46 executes the variable display of the pattern by using the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of the stop of the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a dot matrix. In addition, as the pattern to be variably displayed on the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46, a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. Alternatively, a configuration in which a plurality of kinds of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 51 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 51. The upper portion of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the drop of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 51 starts variable display of symbols based on winning in the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. That is, the symbol display device 51 performs variable display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and variable display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 51 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 52 is a first holding lamp section 53 provided in a lower left area of the symbol display device 51, a second holding lamp section 54 provided in a lower right area of the symbol display apparatus 51, and a symbol display. The third holding lamp unit 55 provided in the upper region of the device 51.

The first holding lamp section 53 is a section for displaying the number of held game balls that have won in the upper working opening 36, and is turned on according to the number of held balls. The first hold lamp unit 53 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 51.
The second holding lamp section 54 is a section for displaying the number of held game balls that have won the lower working opening 37, and is turned on according to the number of held balls. The second holding lamp unit 54 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 51.

The third holding lamp section 55 is a section for displaying the number of held game balls that have won in each through gate 41, and is turned on according to the number of held balls. The third holding lamp unit 55 can hold up to four game balls and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
Each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 51.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device. Specifically, FIG. 4(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the case of performing variable display of a pattern triggered by winning in the upper operation opening 36, and FIG. 4(B). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the case of performing variable display of a pattern triggered by winning in the lower working opening 37.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is divided into three columns of display areas, and in each display area, a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol are sequentially arranged from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is shown by a dashed line.

When the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the upper operation opening 36 as a trigger, each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is composed of the numbers "1" to "8" as shown in FIG. 4(A). The eight kinds of symbols are arranged in an ascending order from the lower side to the upper side, and are arranged so that the next to "8" is "1".
When the variable display of the patterns is executed with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is formed of the letters “A” to “C” as shown in FIG. 4(B). The three types of symbols are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and are arranged so that the next to "C" is "A".
Therefore, the player looks at the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and confirms which one of the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 wins the prize to perform the variable display of the pattern. can do.

The symbol display device 51 is configured to periodically scroll symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for game play is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game use is changed from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. End with state.
That is, the game time is until the predetermined stop result is displayed after the variable display is started on the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 51 based on the winning of each of the operation ports 36 and 37.

The manner of variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 51 is not limited to this, but is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol columns, the scrolling direction of each symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. can be appropriately changed. Further, the design of each design row may be a mode in which a picture and a number or an alphabet are combined instead of the mode in which only the number or the alphabet is used, or may be a mode only in the picture.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs a payout control device 70 that executes the payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes the above-described launch control that causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game balls. And a firing control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game control (main control), and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace when it is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace when it is opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is configured by joining a plurality of case bodies, and a joining portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating the case bodies is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to employ a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off when it remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 forming the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured into individual chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/loss table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, a power combination win/loss table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply when holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, holding ball storage area 64b, electric-commitment holding area 64c, and various flag storage areas 64d.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 is an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower working opening 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. The blade member drive unit 401c that opens and closes the plate 401a, the plate drive unit 403c that opens and closes the plate 403a, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role object driving unit 37b to open and close the electric role object 37a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 38c to open/close the special winning opening 38a. Further, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c to open/close the blade member 401a, and also executes drive control of the plate drive unit 403c to open/close the plate 403a. In addition, in each game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operation openings 36 and 37.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V output from the power supply/launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives electric power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 50a to 50g are provided at the general winning opening 35, the upper working opening 36, the lower working opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the right winning entrance 404, and the through gates 41. They are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50g, the MPU 62 makes a prize determination (ball determination) for each of the various winning openings, the out opening 39, the right entrance 404, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes the internal lottery based on the winning determination to the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37.

The payout control device 70 executes a payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a lending ball (a game ball to lend to a player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply/launch control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and storage to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 80 executes the firing control for causing the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes the internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 in the lottery for the hit occurrence, uses the hit type counter C2 in the lottery for the type of the hit when the hit occurs, and reaches the lottery for whether or not the reach display is generated. The random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display duration time in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is in the electric opening state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is regularly updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as the acquisition information storage means.

The reserve ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reserve area Ra, a second result display section reserve area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas: a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each set of values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in time series to each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into the upper operation port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, in the case where the winning on the upper working opening 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, holds the reservation information in the order of the first area Ra1→the second area Ra2→the third area Ra3→the fourth area Ra4. Store in time series.

As described above, since the first result display holding area Ra has four storage areas, the winning of the game balls to the upper working opening 36 is held up to a maximum of four. In addition, the first result display holding area Ra has a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plural such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular. May be.

The second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 time-sequentially sets each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into the lower working opening 37 by using the set of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as the hold information. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, in the case where the winning to the lower working opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, holds the reservation information in the order of the first area Rb1, the second area Rb2, the third area Rb3, and the fourth area Rb4. Store in time series.

In this way, the second result display holding area Rb is provided with four storage areas, so that a maximum of four gaming balls can be won in the lower working opening 37. In addition, the second result display holding area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves relating to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four and may be any number, and may be another plural number such as two, three, or five or more, and is a single number. May be.

The execution area AE is the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb when the variable display of the result display portions 45a and 45b is started. Is an area for moving.

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and reaching 0 after reaching the maximum value 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41.
Then, the MPU 62 performs a lottery (electrical accessory) based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37 is in the electrical open state. Open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequencies at which the game balls can be won in the lower working port 37 are different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an electric power combination hit/miss table in which values of random numbers for winning the electric power combination opening are stored.
As shown in FIG. 7, among the values of the electric accessory release counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the release of the electric role is, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 5) is stored as a power combination win/loss table (power combination win/loss information group).

In addition, the electric power combination hit/miss table for the low frequency support mode (low frequency electric power duty information) shown in FIG. 7A and the high frequency support mode for the high frequency support mode shown in FIG. 7B. And a power combination hit/miss table (a high-frequency use power hit/miss information group).
The MPU 62 executes the lottery for generating the electric role release by comparing these electric role win/loss tables with the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer.

These electric power combination win/loss tables have the results (electric power hand win/loss results) of a plurality of electric power hand open occurrences of “electric power hand open win” and “miss result”.
Here, "electric role combination open win" is an electric role combination win/loss result in which the electric role object 37a of the lower operation port 37 is in the electric role open state.

Specifically, in the gaming state in which the low frequency support mode electric role win/loss table is referred to in the lottery when the electric hand open is generated, as shown in FIG. The value of the random number is 1. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory release lottery wins the electric role release occurrence with a probability of 1/251.
Further, in the low frequency support mode, except for the value of the random number that is "winning of electric power combination", the result is "missing result" without winning the electric power opening.

On the other hand, in the game state in which the electric-role winning/missing table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the lottery when the electric-role opening is generated, as shown in FIG. The value of is one.
In addition, in the high frequency support mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "disconnection result", the winning combination is won and the "combination opening result" is obtained. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory release lottery wins the electric role release occurrence with a probability of about 250/251.
It should be noted that the random number value and the number stored in each power combination win/loss table are arbitrary, and if the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of being a “power combination open win” than the low frequency support mode. Good.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls are easier to win the lower working opening 37, as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the gaming ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will win the lower working opening 37 is higher than the upper working opening 36.
Then, when the winning of the lower working opening 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.

The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the number of times of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state, when compared with the low frequency support mode, when winning the electric role release. Further, for example, the high-frequency support mode is configured such that, when winning the electric-role opening, the one-time opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode. May be. Further, for example, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state is shortened during each opening in the single electric-role open state as compared with the low-frequency support mode. You may comprise. In addition, for example, in the high frequency support mode, a securing time (1 in the character product display unit 46) that is at least ensured as a standby time after finishing the electric character material open lottery and performing the next electric character material open lottery. It may be configured to shorten the duration of the variable display for each time) as compared with the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a short securing time is easily selected in comparison with the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the low-frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may be made relatively high compared with.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode functions as the first gaming state in which the probability of entering the upper working opening 36 is higher than that of the lower working opening 37. Further, the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, and is a second gaming state in which the player has a more advantageous gaming state than the low frequency supporting mode. Function.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599 by incrementing the previous value by 1 each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. .. Further, the winning random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it makes a loop. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the winning random number counter C1.

The hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36, and the game ball wins the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for winning (win/win lottery) based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a win/loss table that stores the value of a random number that is won for winning.
As shown in FIG. 8, among the values of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the random number that is won in the hit occurrence is stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/miss information group storage means. It is stored as (a win/loss information group).

The win/loss table includes a first win/loss table (first win/loss information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second win/loss table (second win/loss information group) shown in FIG. 8(b).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for winning (a big hit or a small hit) by comparing these hit/miss tables with the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first hit/miss table is a big hit against the value of the hit random number counter C1 shifted from the holding area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 based on the winning of the upper operating opening 36. It is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for occurrence. As shown in FIG. 8A, the first win/loss table has two random number values “7” and “77” that are “big hit”.
In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "small win" is 100 from "100 to 199". In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the probability of being “small win” is 1/6.
Furthermore, except for the values of the random numbers that are "big hit win" and "small win", the "normal win result" is obtained without winning the big hit.

The second hit/miss table is smaller than the value of the hit random number counter C1 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. This is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for winning. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the second win/loss table, there are 480 random number values of “small win”. In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the probability of being a “small win” is 4/5.
Here, the values of the random numbers that are the “big hit prize” and the “small hit” that are stored in the first win/loss table are included in the values of the random numbers that are the “small win” that are stored in the second win/loss table. There is.

In addition, except for the value of the random number that is "small win", the small win is not won and the result is "normal failure".
The random number value and the number of random numbers stored in each win/loss table are arbitrary. In addition, the value of the random number that is the "small win" stored in the second win/loss table does not include the value of the random number that is "big win" and "small win" that are stored in the first win/loss table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the values of the random numbers that are the “big hit prize” and the “small hit prize” stored in the first win/loss table.

Here, “big hit” is a result of winning or failing to shift to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the “small hit prize” is a result of winning or failing to shift to the variable ball entry execution mode. Then, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right entrance port 404.
In the following description, transition to the opening/closing execution mode when a ball enters the right entrance 404 is also referred to as a jackpot occurrence.

Here, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the probability of being a “small win” is 1/6. Since it is about 1/10 of the open period of 401a, the probability of winning the jackpot and shifting to the variable payoff execution mode is about 1/60.
In addition, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the probability of being a “small hit” is 4/5. Since it is about 1/10 of the open period, the probability of winning the jackpot and shifting to the variable ball execution mode is about 1/12.5.

Next, the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29. ..
The hit type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36, and the game ball wins the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, based on the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) for the type of the hit when a hit occurs.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a distribution table that stores the value of a random number related to the distribution destination of the winning type.
As shown in FIG. 9, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the hit type is stored in the distribution table (distribution table) in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9A and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9B. ing.
The MPU 62 executes the lottery of the winning type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first allocation table is for the value of the hit type counter C2 shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, for the value of the hit type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper working opening 36. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of winning type is performed.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the first distribution table includes “low frequency support mode result (sorting result corresponding to low frequency support mode)” and “high frequency support mode result (sorting corresponding to high frequency support mode). Multiple results)” as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the first allocation table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 14” is allocated to “low frequency support mode result” and “15 to 29” is classified as “high”. Frequency support mode results”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the probability of being the “low frequency support mode result” is 50%, and the probability of being the “high frequency support mode result” is also 50%. is there.

The second distribution table is for the value of the hit type counter C2 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of winning type is performed.
As shown in FIG. 9B, the second distribution table includes “low frequency support mode result (sorting result corresponding to low frequency support mode)” and “high frequency support mode result (sorting corresponding to high frequency support mode). Multiple results)” as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the second allocation table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 9” is allocated to “low frequency support mode result” and “10 to 29” is classified as “high”. Frequency support mode results”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the probability of being the “low frequency support mode result” is about 33%, and the probability of being the “high frequency support mode result” is about 67%. %.

The “low frequency support mode result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode except when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This low frequency support mode continues until a big hit occurs.
The “high frequency support mode result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 238. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36, and the game ball wins the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is "normally out of sync" without being "big hit" or "small win" in the win/loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b in the case where the result is “out of normal” without being “big hit” or “small win” in the win/loss lottery. By comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3, a lottery for determining whether or not the reach display is generated is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of the random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63d (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

Here, in the win/no win lottery, when it becomes a “big hit” and is distributed to the “high frequency support mode result” in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 has the same odd number as the stop result. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Further, in the win/loss lottery, when the result is “big hit” and is distributed to the “low frequency support mode result” in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 51 has a symbol having the same even number as the stop result. The combination of is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Further, in the case of "small hit prize" in the winning/winning lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the symbol display device 51 does not indicate a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normal failure result” in the win/loss lottery is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. In the case of “small win” in the win/loss lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the symbol display device 51 determines that the combination of symbols having the same English character is the effective line L as the stop result. Stop display on top.

The reach display is performed when the combination of symbols having the same numbers or the same alphabetic characters is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit" in the winning/disapproving lottery, or based on the winning of the lower working opening 37). If the winning/winning lottery results in "small win", it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is a reach display when a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (in the case of “small win” in the win/loss lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 36). It does not occur regardless of the value of the random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 are part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) on the activated line L. By the stop display, the same symbol combination is displayed to suggest the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, so that after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the “big hit” or “small hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery. The player can be expected to have won the prize.

The form of the reach display is not limited to this. A part of the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol sequence is variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background. Alternatively, each symbol row may be reduced or displayed, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 51. With the expected effect, after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51, before the predetermined stop result is displayed, it may have been a “big hit prize” or a “small hit prize” in the win/loss lottery game. A production that makes people expect. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice will be displayed when the "big win" or "small win" is selected in the win/loss lottery, and the "normal win result" is not reached in the "big win" or "small win" in the win/loss lottery. Is an expected production that makes production easy to occur. Instead of facilitating the production of the effects, the notice display may facilitate the selection of the effects with a low appearance rate, or may combine these.
It should be noted that while the lottery for generating the reach display is executed by the main control device 60, the lottery for generating the advance notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

The mode of the notice display is that some of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 are variably displayed (for example, some symbol columns). A predetermined character is displayed in a state where the symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L and then a plurality of symbol rows (for example, the symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or the reach display is generated. Are displayed as a moving image on the display screen G. This notice display is generated both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set to occur more easily when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this. For example, the background may be changed and displayed, or the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once every time a normal process described later is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Various processing executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process for advancing a game, and a main process which is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 10, the MPU 62 executes steps S101 to S105 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, determines the states, and stores the states in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets the prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 detects the winning of the game ball, the prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls which is the specific unit number. Is sent to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to execute the payout of the prize balls, based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. If the maximum value is reached when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the maximum values are reached when adding 1 to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In the winning process for the through, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50f corresponding to each through gate 41 detects the winning of the game ball, the electric auditors release counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric power holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the third holding lamp section 55, and transmits the set command to the voice light emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the through gate 41 is four, and the third number of holding lamps 55 is turned on by a number corresponding to this number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port. After that, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the working port will be described in detail.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50b corresponding to the upper working opening 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the gaming ball has won (starting winning) in the upper working opening 36. Determine whether. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the upper working opening 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the first result display holding area Ra and holds it. The number is set as a first start pending storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display holding area Ra. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won in the upper working opening 36, the detection sensor 50c corresponding to the lower working opening 37 wins the game ball in step S203. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower working opening 37 (starting winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not won in the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won the lower working opening 37, in step S204, it grasps the number of reserves stored in the second result display reserve area Rb, The reserved number is set as a second starting reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display retaining area Rb. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S205.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting pending storages set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether there is.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of startup pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, it ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of startup pending storages is less than the upper limit value, it updates the value of the number N of startup pending storages by adding 1 in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets the set of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process among the free storage areas of the result display holding area. The information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number N of startup suspension memories updated in step S206 as suspension information.

For example, when the first startup pending storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 selects each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as holding information in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first result display holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup holding storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” in the first startup hold storage number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to “4” of the first startup hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. The reservation information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start pending storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 updates the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. Each set of values is stored as suspension information in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second result display suspension area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. To do. For example, if the MPU 62 sets "3" in the second startup hold storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to "4" of the second startup hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. The reservation information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The sound emission control device 90 turns on the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first retaining lamp unit 53 or the second retaining lamp unit 54 can retain the retained number. Lights up to the number corresponding to.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process which is a main process for advancing a game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes steps S312 and subsequent steps in accordance with the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes a timer interrupt process or an external output process for transmitting the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and when it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62, whether or not the command corresponding to the effect for game play, the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the command for the effect such as the command for the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, or the like is set. If it is determined that the effect command is set, the effect command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS and updates it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. The MPU 62 resets the value of the fluctuation type counter CS to 0 and clears it when the maximum value is reached when 1 is added to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game number control process for advancing the game number. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes the winning/discarding lottery and the sorting lottery, determines the information relating to the design finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and finally the stop and display on the main display unit 45. The determination of information related to is executed.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open/close execution mode, a variable entry execution mode, a low frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game number control process of step S303 and the game state transition process of step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without starting a new game number after the game number has ended. However, if it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
The audio emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S305. For example, when the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the process of step S305 and reaches 750 when the start waiting period is reached. Is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game time while counting the number of executions of the process of step S305, it resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a power combination support process for controlling the drive of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation port 37. In the electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball firing control process, the MPU 62 causes the power/firing control device 80 to perform firing control for firing the game ball based on the player rotating the firing handle 27. Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting a solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited so as to emit a game ball with a firing intensity according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. The power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it is confirmed that a power failure has occurred. It should be noted that this power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main processing.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 into the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 into the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 executes the process at the time of power interruption after step S312 without executing the process after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, in step S309, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal processing, that is, the current normal processing is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not come, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. At, the change type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again to execute the next process. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this startup process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (the control board of the sound emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state. ) Has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S403 and the subsequent steps.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S402. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the process of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the count reaches 10,000. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/firing control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing during power interruption) of normal processing, and if these match, , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 during the power interruption process. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game arcade can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of the business of the game arcade. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the power failure monitoring board 65 has not confirmed the occurrence of a power failure or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (the control board of the sound emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and in step S412, a timer interrupt. The generation of the process is permitted, and the process shifts to the normal process described above.
The control board on the sub side recognizes that the communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed by receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, and executes its own initialization. To do.

<Game time control processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game number control process.
In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether it is in the open/close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in effect, it terminates the game time control processing without executing the processing of step S502 and subsequent steps. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 does not start the game times regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether the open/close execution mode is in operation by referring to the open/close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display, that is, the game game is in progress. It is determined whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 62 executes the game times start process of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is being variably displayed, the MPU 62 executes the game-time progression processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game times start process of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserves stored in the first result display section reserve area Ra and the number of reserves stored in the second result display section reserve area Rb, and reserves these numbers. It is determined whether the total number CRN of is less than or equal to "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, it ends the game number control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Ra. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for digesting the game is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to start the variable display and executes the fluctuation start process for digesting the game time, and ends the game time control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process of step S504 and the fluctuation start process of step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second starting pending storage number RbN of the second result display holding area Rb set in step S204 of the winning process for the working opening is “0” or less. To do. If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second startup pending storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. When it is determined that the second startup pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the holding information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra for digesting the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for use for digesting game times.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second startup pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit, and the second result display unit Data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper working opening 36. Based on the winning of the game ball, the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether there is the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra. Set for digestion once.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first startup hold storage number RaN in the first result display holding area Ra and updates the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process of shifting the holding information stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the reservation information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the reservation information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 45 of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b is starting the variable display when the game is played. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, when the game number is exhausted, a variable display is displayed on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working opening 36. Indicates that it is to be started.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift time command to the voice light emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice light emission control device that indicates that the holding information is shifted for the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working opening 36. It contains information for the 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp unit 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of the first holding lamp units 53 that are turned on as the number of holding game balls that have won the upper working opening 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second startup hold storage number RbN in the second result display holding area Rb and updates the value.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the holding information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process of shifting the reservation information stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the reservation information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the reservation information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variably displayed on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37 when the game number is exhausted. Indicates that it is to be started.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the hold information shift has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice light emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that indicates that the holding information is shifted for the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37. It contains information for the 90 to recognize.
The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of the second holding lamp units 54 that are turned on as the number of holding game balls that have won the lower working opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S717 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the variable display is started on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working opening 36. This means that the first win/loss table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S702.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball into the lower working opening 37. Since the variable display is started in step S703, the second win/loss table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703.

After executing the processing of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the hit/miss determination processing in step S704. In this win/loss determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/loss table read in step S702 or step S703 to determine the win/win result (win/win result). To judge. As mentioned above, the win/fail result is one of “big hit”, “small win”, and “out-of-regular result”. Even if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode Even if there is, it is the same.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/no win result determined in step S704 is a win occurrence (“big hit win” or “small win win”). When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the hit/miss result is a hit occurrence, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S706 and subsequent steps, and when the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the hit/no hit result does not occur, a step S714 and subsequent steps. The process of is executed.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the hit/miss result is a hit in step S705 (processing after step S706) will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the variable display is started on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working opening 36. This means that the first distribution table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S707.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball into the lower working opening 37. Since it indicates that the variable display is started, the second distribution table (see FIG. 9B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After executing the processing of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination processing in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( (Sorting result) is determined.

In step S710, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/swapping result determined in step S704 is “big hit”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the win/no win result is “big hit”, the MPU 62 executes the big hit result stop result setting process in step S711. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the picture finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Then, the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63 to display the final result on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45. The information regarding the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each sorting result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the win/no win result is not “big win” (when the win/no win result is “small win”), the MPU 62 outputs small win result in step S712. The stop result setting process for In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, the MPU 62 determines the information relating to the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and the determination thereof. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for small hit results stored in advance in the ROM 63 to finally display the stop on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. Information concerning the design to be made is determined.

After executing the processing of step S711 or step S712, the MPU 62 sets, in step S713, a flag according to the distribution result determined in step S709 in the RAM 64. Specifically, when the MPU 62 identifies that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”, it sets the low frequency support mode result flag to confirm that the result is the “high frequency support mode result”. If specified, the high frequency support mode result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S715.
In each process described below, the MPU 62 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process (process after step S714) when the MPU 62 determines that the hit result is not hit will be described.
In step S714, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal disconnection result. In the stop result setting process for the normal disengagement result, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination thereof. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The pattern mode set in the stop result table for the normal out-of-court result is different from the pattern modes set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the small hit result.

After executing any one of the processes of step S711, step S712, and step S714, the MPU 62 executes the process of setting the display continuation time (display continuation period) in step S715.
In the display continuation time setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display continuation time setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 51. Specifically, when the win/no win result determined in step S704 is “big hit”, the MPU 62 determines the win/no win result in step S704 is “small win” based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. In the case, or when the win/fail result determined in step S704 is the “normal out-of-range result” and the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, Perform the reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 to obtain the change type counter acquired from the change type counter buffer. The display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in the display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, to thereby obtain the change obtained from the change type counter buffer. The display continuation time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is decided, and the decided display continuation time is set in the display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when the holding information related to the upper working port 36 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper working port 36 increases. The display continuation time when the holding information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower working port 37 increases. In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set to shorten the display duration when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as compared to when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration time in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

Note that the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set in the opposite relationship to the above-mentioned relationship, such that the display duration time is lengthened as the number of held items increases, depending on the number of held items and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to change. Further, the display continuation time table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the distribution result.

In step S716, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S716 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time. Further, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not reach display is generated.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually Different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information as to whether or not the reach display is generated, the reach display is made by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information about the display continuation time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the reach display is generated. The variation command may directly include information as to whether or not reach display is generated.

The type command includes information relating to the result of winning or rejecting. In other words, the type command includes, as the information on the winning/non-hit result, each information on the “big hit winning”, the “small win” and the “out-of-normal result”. Further, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the distribution result, information related to “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”.
In the following description, the winning/discarding result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start the variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first, based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working opening 36, when the game number is exhausted. Since it is indicated that the variable display is started on the result display unit 45a, the first result display unit 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second MPU 62 determines whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64 based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37 when the game is completed. Since it is indicated that the variable display is started on the result display unit 45b, the variable display is started on the second result display unit 45b.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control processing, the game time proceeding processing of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display portion 45 is in the variable display, and when it is determined that the main display portion 45 is in the variable display, for the game time progression of steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S715 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variable display process, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display unit 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the variation end process is executed. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 performs the information (main information stored in the RAM 64 in any one of step S711, step S712, and step S714 of the variation start process executed when starting the variable display on the main display unit 45). The information regarding the design finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45 is specified. Then, at the end of the game game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display unit 45 which is variably displayed. The fluctuation ending process will be described later in detail.

Here, the design that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually checking the main display portion 45 at the end of the game time. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as when the lottery for jackpot occurrence is won. Can be done on a regular basis.
Further, the main display portion 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion 45 are the character strings to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is difficult for the player to recognize as compared with Z1 to Z3. Therefore, at the end of the game, the player can judge whether or not the winning lottery is won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 instead of the main display unit 45. , The degree of attention to the display screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets the fluctuation end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game time, based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to end the effect of the game time independently without the need to receive the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether it is in the open/close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is not being executed, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S802 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S811.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that it is not in the open/close execution mode in step S801 (processing after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable ball entry execution mode is in effect.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the variable ball entry execution mode by referring to the variable ball entry execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the variable-ball-in-execution-mode flag during the transition to the variable-ball-in-execution mode, and clears the variable-ball-in-execution-mode flag in the end of the variable-ball-in-execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball entry execution mode is not in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball entry execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S816.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable ball entry execution mode is not in effect (the processing after step S803) will be described.
In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended, a win/loss result occurs in step S804 (“big hit win” or “small win win”). Or not.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the hit/no hit result has not occurred, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is a win occurrence, the MPU 62 determines in step S805 whether or not the win/win result is "small win."

When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/no win result is "small win", it sets the variable entry execution mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S806, and then ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/no win result is not “small win” (when the win result is “big win”), the MPU 62 opens/closes the RAM 64 in step S807. After the execution mode flag is set, the processes in and after step S808 are executed.

In step S808, the MPU 62 sets "15" in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. This round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the number of round games when shifting to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode ends on the condition that the round game is executed a predetermined number of times. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total winning number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number.

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets "1000" as the opening waiting time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Thus, in step S809, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of distribution result. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of distribution result.
In addition, the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of the distribution result so that the player can recognize the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the case of the distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and the case of the distribution result of “high frequency support mode result”. Alternatively, the configuration may be made to differ greatly depending on the type of distribution result.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. This opening command includes information on the distribution result that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the open/close execution mode (processing after step S811) will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening/closing process.

FIG. 18 is a view showing a flowchart of the special winning opening/closing process.
In the special winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S916 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether the special winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing from step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing of step S906 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is not open in step S901 (processing after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S903. To judge.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", the special winning opening opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the special winning opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process of step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a view showing a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the special winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1003 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "8", and in step S1002, the timer counter T is set to "15000". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

In step S1003, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the special winning opening 38a. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b in the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening process.

The value set in the prize winning counter PC in step S1001 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a.
The value set in the timer counter T in step S1002 defines the upper limit duration time after the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec, as described above. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so that the upper limit of eight gaming balls is the large winning opening. It is easy to win 38a.

Returning to the description of the special winning opening/closing processing, the processing of step S905 and subsequent steps will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening opening process of step S904, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S905. In addition, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process (process after step S906) when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is open in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1002 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S907 and the subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S910 and subsequent steps.

In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no winning of the special winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been paid to the special winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates the value of the prize counter PC by subtracting 1 from it in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, it ends the special winning opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, or in step S906 that it determines that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. In step S910, closing execution processing is executed. In the closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.
In step S913, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it sets "500" to the value of the timer counter T in step S914. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S914 is the waiting for opening until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the present embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening waiting time is the same regardless of the progress of the open/close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the process of step S915 and subsequent steps.
In step S915, the MPU 62 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for ending is the same as the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of distribution result.
Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of distribution result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for ending is greatly different depending on whether it is the distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” or the distribution result of “high frequency support mode result”. Alternatively, the configuration may be made to differ greatly depending on the type of distribution result.

In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S916 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing of step S812 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening/closing process of step S811, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less in step S812.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the game state transition process ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it determines in step S813 whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. To judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", the game state transition process ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the open/close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S814.
In step S815, the MPU 62 executes the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the shift processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1108, as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1102 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The processing after step S1105 is executed.
First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the distribution result is determined to be the “high frequency support mode result” by the MPU 62 in step S1101 will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag when it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes having different support modes which are shifted after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode”. It has a special mode for setting the support mode to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the distribution result of the "mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result" as the game mode.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, it sets the game mode to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been exhausted. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, in step S1101, the processing (processing after step S1105) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” will be described.
When it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”) in step S1101, in step S1105, It is determined whether the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processes in step S1102 and subsequent steps. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”. Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1106. Clear high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the special mode flag in the RAM 64. If the special mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets "30" to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until the game number of 30 times which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 game times have been exhausted. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37.

In this way, if a win occurs in the win/no win lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes “high frequency support mode result”, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After that, it shifts to high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the win/win lottery, and when 100 game times are exhausted, the low frequency support mode is entered. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a win occurs in the win/win lottery and the distribution result is “low frequency support mode result” in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode if the game mode is the special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the win/win lottery, and when 100 game times are exhausted, the low frequency support mode is entered. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the win/win lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when the winning/winning lottery does not result in winning, that is, when the winning/winning result in the winning/winning lottery is “out of normal result”, the gaming state does not shift.

Here, the value of the game number counter RTC is included in the above-mentioned variation command. In addition, information regarding the game mode (information regarding whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the opening command described above.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing of step S816 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable ball entry execution mode is set. When it is determined that the variable ball entry execution mode is set, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S816 and the subsequent steps.

In step S816, the MPU 62 executes a variable ball entry execution process.
The variable ball entry execution process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable ball entry execution process.
In the variable ball entry execution process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1215, as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the blade member 401a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is not open, it executes the processing of step S1202 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is open, it executes the processing of step S1207 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is not open (processing after step S1202) will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 executes blade member opening execution processing. In the blade member opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a in the open state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c.

In step S1203, a blade member opening command is set. Further, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the blade member opening command set in step S1204 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the blade member 401a is set to the open state based on the blade member opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 determines whether the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets "1000" in the timer counter T in step S1205. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 seconds. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the low frequency support mode of the normal mode), the step S1204 In S1206, the timer counter T is set to "50". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.1 sec. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, in step S1201, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a is open (the process after step S1207) will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1208 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1214 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (processing after step S1208) will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 determines whether the opening/closing of the plate 403a has been executed by referring to the plate opening/closing executed flag stored in the RAM 64. The plate opening/closing executed flag is a flag for specifying that the plate 403a has been opened/closed after the blade member 401a is set to the open state and before the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. The MPU 62 sets the plate opening/closing executed flag when the plate 403a is opened/closed, and clears the plate opening/closing executed flag when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening/closing of the plate 403a has been executed (when the plate opening/closing executed flag is set in the RAM 64), the variable entrance execution process ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening/closing of the plate 403a has not been executed (when the plate opening/closing executed flag is not set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the timer counter T It is determined whether the value is "500" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a in the open state. In the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets "50" in the timer counter T in step S1206, and thus determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less. Will be done.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "500" (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, 1 second has not elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state). (If determined), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "500" (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, 1 sec. (When it is determined that has passed), the plate opening process is executed in step S1210. In this plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 403c.

In step S1211, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether 0.2 sec has elapsed after setting the plate 403a in the open state. In the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets "50" to the timer counter T in step S1206, and thus determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. Will be done.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1211, that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "400" (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, 0.2 sec has not elapsed after setting the plate 403a to the open state). If it is determined that), the variable ball entry execution process ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "400" (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the plate 403a is set to the open state, and then 0. If it is determined that 2 seconds have elapsed), plate closing processing is executed in step S1212. In this plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 403c.

In step S1213, the MPU 62 sets the plate opening/closing execution flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the plate opening/closing execution flag provided in the various flag storage area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (processing after step S1214).
In step S1214, the MPU 62 executes the blade member closing execution process. In the blade member closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c.

In step S1215, the MPU 62 substitutes 0 into the area showing the plate opening/closing execution flag and the variable ball entry execution mode flag provided in the various flag storage areas 64d of the RAM 64 to set the plate opening/closing execution flag and variable entry execution flag. Clear the sphere execution mode flag. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

Thus, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a in the open state, allows the game ball to enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40, and opens the plate 403a in the open state or the closed state. It is set so that the game ball can enter either the right entrance 404 or the left entrance 405.

In the variable ball entry execution mode in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, the blade member 401a is set to the open state for the time (open period) after the plate 403a is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again. After that, it is shorter than the time (open period) until the closed state is set again. Specifically, the open period of the plate 403a (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is about 1/10 of the open period of the blade member 401a (2 sec in this embodiment). In other words, the game ball that has entered the right variable ball entrance mechanism 40 will enter the right ball entrance 404 with a probability of about 1/10.

In the present embodiment, the plate 403a performs one opening/closing operation in the opening period of the blade member 401a, but may perform a plurality of opening/closing operations.
Further, in the present embodiment, the open period of the plate 403a is 0.2 sec and the open period of the blade member 401a is 2 sec, but an open period other than these may be adopted.
Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state when it determines that 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, but sets the plate 403a to the open state. The timing to be performed may be a timing other than this.

On the other hand, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the time (opening period) until the blade member 401a is set to the open state and then set to the closed state is 0.2 sec. Therefore, the plate 403a is opened and closed immediately after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. In other words, the game ball cannot enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing of step S817 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the variable ball entry execution process in step S816, the MPU 62 determines in step S817 whether or not the detection sensor 50g corresponding to the right ball entry port 404 has detected a game ball winning, It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (V prize) in the ball opening 404.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has won the right entrance 404, in step S818, it executes the V winning success process. In the V winning success process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c to set the blade member 401a to the closed state, and then the plate opening/closing executed flag and the variable ball execution executed are stored in the RAM 64. Clear the mode flag. In the V winning success process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning success command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the V winning success command set in step S818 to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S807 and subsequent steps described above.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has won in the right entrance 404 based on the V winning success command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has not won in the right entrance 404, it determines in step S819 whether or not the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. To do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S819 that the blade member 401a has not been set to the closed state, the game state transition processing ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S819 that the blade member 401a is set to the closed state, the MPU 62 executes the V winning failure process in step S820. In the V winning failure processing, the MPU 62 sets a V winning failure command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the V winning failure command set in step S820 to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has not won in the right entrance 404 based on the V winning failure command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode as it is in the case of "big hit winning" in the win/win lottery, whereas it changes in the case of "small win" in the win/win lottery. In the variable ball entry execution mode, if the right ball entry 404 is entered in the variable ball entry execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a case where only the left ball entrance 405 is entered, or a right ball entrance 404 and a left ball entrance 405 are both entered. If not, the open/close execution mode is not entered.

Here, as described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37. In addition, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the probability of being a “small win” is 1/6.
However, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, as described above, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 is “small win”, the game ball is on the right side. The variable ball entrance mechanism 40 cannot enter the ball.
In the low frequency support mode of the special mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 is “small hit”, the game ball is the right variable ball entering mechanism 40. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/60 when the player enters the variable entrance execution mode upon winning the prize in the upper working opening 36.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation ending process.
In the fluctuation ending process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1309 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 stores the information stored in the RAM 64 in any one of step S711, step S712, and step S714 of the fluctuation start processing executed when starting the variable display on the main display section 45 (main display section). The information about the design finally stopped and displayed on 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display unit 45 which is displaying the variation (variation end execution process).

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1306 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1303, the game number counter set in step S1104 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Update by subtracting 1 from the RTC value. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the game number counter RTC.
In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether the number-of-games counter RTC is “0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing of step S1306 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the game number counter RTC is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1305. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In this way, in the win/no win lottery, when the "big hit" is selected and the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) regardless of the current gaming state. After that, it shifts to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the game number of 100 times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.

After executing the processing of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines In step S1306, it is determined whether the game mode is the special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it ends the fluctuation ending process without executing the processes of step S1307 and thereafter. ..
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is the special mode, in step S1307, the game number counter RTC of the game number counter RTC set in step S1108 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Update by subtracting 1 from the value. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the game number counter RTC.

In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether the number-of-games counter RTC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, it ends the fluctuation ending process without executing the processes of step S1309 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the number-of-games counter RTC is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation ending process.

In this way, when the special jackpot is selected and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in the win/no win lottery, the game state is the end of the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) regardless of the current game state. After that, it shifts to the special mode. The special mode continues until the game number of 30 times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, based on the result of the internal lottery (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result), the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode does not have the special mode game mode, but it may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the opening and closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of attention of the player to the game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to enter. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the lower working opening 37, the probability (about 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode is , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36, it becomes higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode. There is. According to this, since the player expects to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. Transfer the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, and the normal mode when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. Transfer the game mode to. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, the pachinko machine 10 uses the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the game state to the high frequency support mode, Although the game mode is transferred to the normal mode, the game mode may be transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game is played a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment) after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is played, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode, but other than this. When the number of game times is exhausted, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. For example, the number of times the game times are exhausted is set to a plurality of times such as 30 times and 50 times. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37, if the number of "small wins" exceeds a predetermined number, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it shift.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route while staying in the special mode. According to this, in the high-frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route, and in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode result is the high frequency. It functions as the second lottery result of shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high frequency support mode even when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
And, the low frequency support mode, when the low frequency support mode result is the normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode, and when the low frequency support mode result is the high frequency support mode, the game state is changed. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a 100% higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, switches from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is transferred and the game state is transferred from the open/close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when shifting the game state from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at a timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

<Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 23, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside when holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55 and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via connector units (connection units) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that compose the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the voice light emission control device 90 and performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed, and is volatile that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 51. The character ROM 106 holds bit map format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 regularly executes steps S2001 to S2005 (for example, in a 2 msec cycle), as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storing process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading the commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer according to the order of storage in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines an effect for game play, an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process of step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time ends. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 and the demo display execution process of step S2004 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit the various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and then the various commands are displayed. If it is determined that the timing to transmit to the display control device 100 has been reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, whether or not the win/win result is “big hit” To judge.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the win/no win result is “big hit”, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the win/no win result is not “big hit”, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2104 and thereafter.

First, in step S2102, the process (the process after step S2103) when the MPU 92 determines that the win/no win result is “big hit” will be described.
In step S2103, the MPU 92 executes a jackpot symbol determination process. In the symbol determination process for the jackpot, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the same odd number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is displayed. When the information regarding the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”, the same even number is finally displayed as the stop result on the activated line L. The information regarding the combination of symbols having the numbers is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Next, in step S2102, a process (process after step S2104) when the MPU 92 determines that the win/no win result is not “big hit” will be described.
In step S2104, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the win/no win result is “small win” based on the content of the type command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the win/no win result is “small win”, the MPU 92 executes the small hit symbol determination process in step S2105. In the symbol determination process for the small hit, when the “small hit” is selected in the winning/winning lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the MPU 92 finally stops on the activated line L. Information relating to a special symbol combination is determined as the stop result to be displayed. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normal failure result” in the win/loss lottery (for example, "3.4.1") is decided. When the winning/winning lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37 is “small hit”, the MPU 92 has the same English character as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to a combination of symbols is determined.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the win/loss result is not the “small hit prize” (when it is determined that the win/fail result is the “out-of-normal result”), it is normally out of step S2106. The symbol determination process for is executed. In the symbol determination process for normal disengagement, the MPU 92 executes the variable display of the pattern based on the content of the command for variation, with which of the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 as a trigger the winning of the prize. Reach display is generated based on the content of the variation command while determining which (of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b the main display section 45 executes the variation display). It is determined whether to do.

When the MPU 92 determines that the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the prize on the upper operation opening 36 as a trigger, and when the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 finally reaches the effective line L by stopping the reach display as a stop result. Information relating to a combination of displayed symbols is determined. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines the information regarding the symbol combination different from the symbol combination described above as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. To do. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a symbol having a combination different from any of the symbol combinations having the same numbers, the special symbol combinations, and the reach symbol combinations.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger and the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the result on the activated line L. As the information regarding the combination of the symbols of the reach display is determined.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines the information regarding the symbol combination different from the symbol combination described above as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. To do. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines a symbol combination that is different from both the symbol combinations having the same alphabetic character and the reach symbol combination.

After executing the processing of step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, the MPU 92 executes effect pattern determination processing in step S2107. In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the effect content as effect patterns. In addition, in step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to issue a notice display.

Here, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, when the MPU 92 becomes the “small win” as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37, Before the variable display of the symbol display device 51 is completed, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and a preliminary notification effect for informing the player to make a right hit is executed at the line of the character. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the preliminary notification effect 5 seconds before the variable display of the symbol display device 51 ends. According to this, the player causes the game ball to reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 before setting the blade member 401a in the open state by the MPU 62 by starting right-handing after confirming the advance notification effect. You can In other words, the game ball can reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 within 5 seconds after being launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37 is “small win” In addition, the player can enter the game ball into the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40 by starting right-handing after confirming the advance notification effect.
Here, as described above, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working port 36 than in the lower working port 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball has the upper working port 36. The probability of winning the lower working opening 37 is higher than that. Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the lower working opening 37, the probability (about 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode is: It is higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode functions as the first time saving state in which it is easy to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. The low frequency support mode of the special mode functions as a second time saving state in which it is more difficult to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 as compared to the high frequency support mode. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of gaming states that can shift the gaming state from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode when the gaming ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and thus the pachinko machine. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, when the MPU 92 becomes the “small win” as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Does not execute the preliminary notification effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37 is “small win” In addition, since the player cannot confirm the advance notification effect, he/she cannot enter the game ball into the right variable ball input mechanism 40. In other words, the low frequency support mode of the normal mode cannot enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the gaming ball has a higher probability of winning in the lower working port 37 than in the upper working port 36, so in the high-frequency support mode, the gaming ball heads toward the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a first time saving state that is in a situation that is advantageous for the player. In the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working port 36 than the lower working port 37, so in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball is directed toward the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a second time saving state, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player as compared with the high frequency support mode. In other words, the low-frequency support mode of the special mode is in an advantageous situation for the player by firing the game ball toward the left-handed route. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the right side variable ball input mechanism 40, so that the pachinko machine can be diversified. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the first time saving state has a higher probability of winning in the lower working opening 37 than the upper working opening 36, and the second time saving state is in the upper working opening 36 more than the lower working opening 37. By increasing the probability of winning the prize, a situation that is advantageous and a situation that is disadvantageous to the player is created. On the other hand, the first time-saving state shortens the display continuation time of the variable display based on the winning on the lower working opening 37, and the second time-saving state changes on the basis of the winning on the lower working opening 37. Prolonging the display duration of the display may create advantageous and unfavorable situations for the player.

Further, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 and the voice control of the speaker section 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S2107. Then, the MPU 92 stores the stop result command and the pattern command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for game play on the symbol display device 51. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the game reproduction effect based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and finally sets the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L. Stop the display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when determining that the variation command and the type command have not been received in step S2101, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the command for the variable ball entry execution mode (the blade member opening command, the V winning success command, or the V winning failure command) transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable ball entry execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2112 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable ball entry execution mode has been received, the MPU 92 executes the process for determining the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode in step S2110. In the process for determining the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the blade member opening command is received, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, An effect pattern corresponding to the opening of the blade member 401a is selected. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the V winning success command has been received, the MPU 92 selects the effect pattern corresponding to the successful V winning by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. If it is determined in step S2109 that the V winning failure command has been received, the production pattern corresponding to the failure of the V winning is selected by referring to the production table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 sets a command for the variable entrance execution mode including the effect for the variable entrance execution mode selected in step S2110. Then, the MPU 92 stores the command for the variable entrance execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The command for the variable ball entry execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100, based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92, effects for the variable ball entry execution mode (opening of the blade member 401a, success of V winning, or failure of V winning). The data table for executing the effect corresponding to (1) on the symbol display device 51 is read from the program ROM 103. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, and notifies the player that the blade member 401a is opened, that the V winning is successful, or that the V winning is unsuccessful.

After executing the processing of step S2111, or when determining in step S2109 that the command for the variable ball entry execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2112 and subsequent steps.
In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 the type of distribution result is determined based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204, as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When determining that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2202. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode at the time of "big hit" in the win/no win lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2202 and subsequent steps, and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, it is rendered as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Select B. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the special winning opening 38a is opened/closed 15 times in the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process of step S2115 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an open/close execution mode command including information related to the effect for open/close execution mode selected in step S2114. The open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51, based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, the close command, the ending command, and the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game result and game state>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result and a game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the “normal disengagement result” and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 27, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode and a special mode game mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as the game result excluding "normal disengagement result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “out-of-normal result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state and the like, the content of the game result, and The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state are different depending on the game results of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

In the "low frequency support mode result", the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning on the upper operation port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B. Furthermore, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" game results.
Specifically, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

Therefore, the player confirms that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Entering the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a game use effect in the case where a game ball is won in the lower operation opening triggered by a prize in the through gate in the high frequency support mode.
In addition, the high frequency support mode becomes "big hit prize" or "small win" in the win/loss lottery, and if the result is distributed to the "high frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, or if you are in the special mode In the lottery, the “big hit” is selected, and in the sorting lottery, the result is distributed to the “low frequency support mode result”. Further, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the win/no win result is “small win”.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. The transition to the high speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number (55 times in FIG. 28A) up to the reference number for ending the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 28(A), stops and displays some of the symbol columns (the symbol column Z1 and the symbol column Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4(B)). By doing so, the same symbol combination (“A” in the present embodiment) is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol string (symbol string Z2) is variably displayed in that state to achieve the reach display. Generate and shift to the reach period.

After that, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 28B, as a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character (“AAA” in the present embodiment) is an effective line. By displaying a stop on L, the result of the lottery is notified.

After the combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters is stopped and displayed on the activated line L by the MPU 102, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c as shown in FIG. 28(C). The blade member 401a is set to the open state.
In addition, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player of the character's dialogue so that the character is right-handed.

Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, as shown in FIGS. 28D and 28E, based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode received from the MPU 92.
In the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102, in the variable ball entry execution mode, based on the V winning success command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance 404. As shown in FIG. 28D, the effect corresponding to the success of the V winning is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character “V” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to notify the player that the game ball has won the right entrance 404 (V prize). ..
In addition, in the effect for the variable winning execution mode, the MPU 102, based on the V winning failure command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball does not win the right winning opening 404 (V winning), FIG. As shown in E), the effect corresponding to the failure of the V winning is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the word “sorry” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball has not won (V prize) in the right entrance 404. Inform.

FIG. 29 is an enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The MPU 62 causes the MPU 102 to stop and display a combination of symbols having the same letter on the activated line L, and then, as shown in FIGS. 28(C) and 29(A), drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c. The blade member 401a is set to the open state by executing (see arrow in the figure).

The MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state, and when 1 second has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the plate drive unit 403c to open the plate 403a, as shown in FIG. After setting (see the arrow in the figure) and a predetermined time (0.2 sec in this embodiment), the plate 403a is set to the closed state (see the arrow in FIG. 29C).
Then, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG. 29C, when the game ball wins the right entrance 404 (V win) or when 2 seconds elapses after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. The blade member 401a is set to the closed state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c (see the arrow in the figure).

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right entrance (V prize).
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 responds to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. 30(A) when the game ball is won (V winning) in the right entrance 404. Perform the production. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 30(B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the line "RUSH rush!" Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 30(C)) based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2204. In this effect B, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. "!" to inform the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (transition to special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the number of remaining times (30 times in FIG. 30(E)) up to the reference number for ending the special mode, based on the content of the variation command. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an effect for game play when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number (15 times in FIG. 31(A)) up to the reference number for ending the special mode, based on the content of the variation command, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Display in the upper left of. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol rows (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(A)), so that the same symbol combination ( In the present embodiment, “2”) is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol string (symbol string Z2) is variably displayed in that state to generate the reach display and shift to the reach period.

After that, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) as the stop result is the effective line. By displaying a stop on L, the result of the lottery is notified. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31(C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the line of the character "rush into RUSH!" Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the number of remaining times (100 times in FIG. 31(C)) up to the reference number for ending the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 has exhausted 30 game times without being a “big hit” in the win/loss lottery, it shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 31(D).

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, the high speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol columns (the symbol column Z1 and the symbol column Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(A)), thereby combining the same symbols. By displaying and suggesting the stop result, and by variably displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) in that state, the reach display is generated to shift to the reach period.

Then, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result on the activated line L, thereby informing the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, in step S2202, the effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31(C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the line of the character "rush into RUSH!" Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the number of remaining times (100 times in FIG. 31(C)) up to the reference number for ending the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2204. In this effect B, as shown in FIG. 31(E), the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the dialogue "30 rotation chance zone" of this character. "!" to inform the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (transition to special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number (30 times in FIG. 31(E)) up to the reference number for ending the special mode, based on the content of the variation command. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) In the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the game state to one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery, In the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so even if the player shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode, the player switches to the special mode. You will play with the expectation that you are staying. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The main controller 60 shifts the gaming state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode when the gaming state shifts from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, so that the player is low. When shifting to the frequency support mode, attention is paid to whether or not the user stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) In the low frequency support mode, the probability of entering the upper working opening 36 is higher than in the lower working opening 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the probability of entering the lower working opening 37 is higher than that in the upper working opening 36. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball at the upper working port 36, and in the high frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball at the lower working port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can clearly suggest the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode to the player.

(4) Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower working port 37, the probability of shifting to the open/close execution mode is executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36. It is higher than the probability of shifting to the open/close execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode. We will pay attention to the number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(7) The result of the internal lottery includes a low frequency support mode result of shifting the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode result of shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. Since it is equipped with, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high frequency support mode even if the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and the opportunity to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode. Can be increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(8) The low frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is reached, and a high frequency support mode when the low frequency support mode result is reached. Since the player has a special mode for shifting to, the player expects that he/she stays in the special mode even when he/she shifts the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and plays the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(9) The low frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode, and the main control device 60 sets the low frequency support mode to the game state. At the time of the transition, the game mode is shifted to the special mode, and when the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, so the player shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode. Even if you do, you will play with the expectation that you are staying in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(10) The gaming state is a high frequency support mode in which it is easy to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and a low frequency in a special mode in which it is difficult to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 as compared to the high frequency support mode. Since the support mode is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right side variable ball input mechanism 40. .. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) The game state is high by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route, which is a high-frequency support mode in which it is advantageous for the player, and by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route. Since a low frequency support mode, which is a special mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the frequency support mode, is provided, the opening/closing execution mode is changed from the normal control state when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. It is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be transferred to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, in the win/loss lottery, when the “big hit” is selected and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) regardless of the current game state. After the end of), it had transitioned to the special mode. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result”, and determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (game mode). If it is determined to be the normal mode), the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1107. In other words, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 always shifts to the special mode when shifting to the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether to shift to the special mode and wins this lottery. In this case, the special mode is different from the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a shift process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1113A as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1102 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The processing after step S1105 is executed.
First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the distribution result is determined to be the “high frequency support mode result” by the MPU 62 in step S1101 will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag when it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes having different support modes which are shifted after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode”. It has a special mode for setting the support mode to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the distribution result of the "mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result" as the game mode.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, it sets the game mode to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been exhausted. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, in step S1101, the processing (processing after step S1105) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” will be described.
When it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”) in step S1101, in step S1105, It is determined whether the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processes in step S1102 and subsequent steps. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”. Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1106. Clear high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In step S1109A, the MPU 62 executes a special mode lottery process. Specifically, in the special mode lottery process, the MPU 62 executes a lottery of whether or not to shift to the special mode with a predetermined probability (1/8 in this embodiment) after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of shifting to the special mode to ⅛, but may be larger than ⅛ or smaller than ⅛. Further, for example, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of shifting to the special mode when the number of game times that have been exhausted until it becomes a “big hit prize” in the win/loss lottery is smaller than a predetermined number, and the “big hit” wins. If the number of game times that have been exhausted before becoming ``winning'' is greater than the predetermined number, the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased, and the probability of shifting to the special mode depending on other gaming situations It may be changed.

In step S1110A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special mode lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1107 and thereafter.

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the special mode flag in the RAM 64. If the special mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets "30" to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1111A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode. This special mode command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1111A to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until the game number of 30 times which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 game times have been exhausted. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has not been won, the process of step S1112A and subsequent steps is executed.
In step S1112A, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1113A, the MPU 62 sets "0" to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

In this way, if a win occurs in the win/no win lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes “high frequency support mode result”, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After that, it shifts to high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the win/win lottery, and when 100 game times are exhausted, the low frequency support mode is entered. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a win occurs in the win/win lottery and the distribution result is “low frequency support mode result” in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode if the game mode is the special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the win/win lottery, and when 100 game times are exhausted, the low frequency support mode is entered. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the win/win lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode becomes a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and becomes a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when the winning/winning lottery does not result in winning, that is, when the winning/winning result in the winning/winning lottery is “out of normal result”, the gaming state does not shift.

Here, the value of the game number counter RTC is included in the above-mentioned variation command. In addition, information regarding the game mode (information regarding whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the opening command described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, based on the result of the internal lottery (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result), the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode does not have the special mode game mode, but it may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the opening and closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of attention of the player to the game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to enter. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the lower working opening 37, the probability (about 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode is , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36, it becomes higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode. There is. According to this, since the player expects to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. Transfer the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60, when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, shifts the game mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. , The game mode is transferred to the normal mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, the pachinko machine 10 uses the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, when moving the game state to the low frequency support mode, shifts the game mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and shifts the game state to the high frequency support mode. In, the game mode is transferred to the normal mode, but the game mode may be transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game is played a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment) after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is played, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode, but other than this. When the number of game times is exhausted, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. For example, the number of times the game times are exhausted is set to a plurality of times such as 30 times and 50 times. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37, when the number of "small wins" exceeds a predetermined number, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it shift.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route while staying in the special mode. According to this, in the high-frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route, and in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode result is the high frequency. It functions as the second lottery result of shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high frequency support mode even when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
And, the low frequency support mode, when the low frequency support mode result is the normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode, and when the low frequency support mode result is the high frequency support mode, the game state is changed. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a 100% higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, switches from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is transferred and the game state is transferred from the open/close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when shifting the game state from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at a timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode functions as a special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. According to this, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Will pay attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode executes the special mode lottery in the special mode lottery process of step S1109A. However, for example, in combination with other lottery such as distribution lottery. The special mode lottery may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 as in the first embodiment, and thereafter executes the processes of step S2112 and subsequent steps.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2117A and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 the type of distribution result is determined based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204A as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When determining that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2202. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode at the time of "big hit" in the win/no win lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2202 and subsequent steps, and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, it is rendered as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Select B1. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B1 corresponds to the time when the special winning opening 38a is opened/closed 15 times in the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B1.

Here, the effect B1 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the dialogue "30 rotation chance zone" of the character. "!" to inform the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (shift to special mode) (see FIG. 30(D) and FIG. 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B1 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the special mode for the player. This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify that the shift to.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process of step S2115 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets the open/close execution mode command including the information related to the effect for open/close execution mode selected in step S2114A. The open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51, based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2117A and subsequent steps.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether the special mode command is received.

When determining that the special mode command is received in step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the special mode notification process based on the content of the special mode command in step S2118A. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for notifying the player of the shift to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the shift to the special mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and is special for the player in the line of the character "30 rotation chance zone!" Notify that the mode will be entered.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the special mode command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and thereafter.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, the close command, the ending command, and the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game result and game state>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result and a game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the “normal disengagement result” and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 35, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as the game result excluding "normal disengagement result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “out-of-normal result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state and the like, the content of the game result, and The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state are different depending on the game results of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

In the "low frequency support mode result", the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B1. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B1. Furthermore, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes a "special mode" with a probability of 1/8 and a "normal mode" with a probability of 7/8.

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" game results.
Specifically, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

Therefore, the player confirms that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow of game balls after entering the right side variable ball entering mechanism>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right entrance (V prize).
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning, as shown in FIG. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's dialogue "Rush into!" Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 36(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 36(C)) based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, it sets the special mode command in step S1111A, and the MPU 92 receives the special mode command in step S2117A. If determined, in step S2118A, the special mode notification process is executed based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to display a character after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. The player is informed of the shift to the special mode in the "30 rotation chance zone!"

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has not been won, it does not set the special mode command, so the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The character and the dialogue of this character are not displayed on the screen G, and the player is not notified of the shift to the special mode (not shown).
In the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and notifies the player of the shift to the special mode. By not doing so, he was informing that he did not win the special mode lottery. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays the character and the line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and impersonates the character as if the character was drawn in the special mode lottery. Good. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the special mode lottery is won.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode becomes a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and becomes a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the number of remaining times (30 times in FIG. 36(E)) up to the reference number for ending the special mode, based on the content of the variation command. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an effect for game play when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times until the reference number of times of ending the special mode (15 times in FIG. 37(A)) based on the content of the variation command, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Display in the upper left of. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol rows (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(A)), so that the same symbol combination ( In the present embodiment, “2”) is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol string (symbol string Z2) is variably displayed in that state to generate the reach display and shift to the reach period.

Thereafter, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 37(B), the combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) as the stop result is the effective line. By displaying a stop on L, the result of the lottery is notified. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. The player is informed that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the number of remaining times (100 times in FIG. 37(C)) up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 37(D) when 30 game times are exhausted without being a “big hit” in the win/loss lottery.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, the high speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol columns (the symbol column Z1 and the symbol column Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(A)), thereby combining the same symbols. By displaying and suggesting the stop result, and by variably displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) in that state, the reach display is generated to shift to the reach period.

Then, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result on the activated line L, thereby informing the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, in step S2202, the effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the line "RUSH rush!" The player is informed that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the number of remaining times (100 times in FIG. 37(C)) up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, it sets the special mode command in step S1111A, and the MPU 92 receives the special mode command in step S2117A. If determined, in step S2118A, the special mode notification process is executed based on the contents of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the line of the character "30 rotation chance zone!" Then, the player is informed of the shift to the special mode (see FIG. 36(D)). Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a leftward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest left-handing to the player.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has not been won, it does not set the special mode command, so the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing operation as shown in FIG. At the end of the mode, neither the character nor the dialogue of this character is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the player is not notified of the shift to the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and notifies the player of the shift to the special mode. By not doing so, he was informing that he did not win the special mode lottery. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays the character and the line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and impersonates the character as if the character was drawn in the special mode lottery. Good. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the special mode lottery is won.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode becomes a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and becomes a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the upper left side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number based on the content of the variation command. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as (1) to (4), (5) to (8), (10) and (11) in the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(12) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. You will pay attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, in the win/loss lottery, when the “big hit” is set and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) regardless of the current gaming state. After the end of), it was transitioned to the special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode is continued until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are exhausted.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the lottery as to whether or not to continue the special mode each time the game times are exhausted after shifting to the special mode, and when the lottery is not won. Differs from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the normal mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the variation end process at the end of the open/close execution mode are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition process and the variation end process at the end of the open/close execution mode in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a shift process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that after the process of step S1107 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is ended without executing the process of step S1108.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation ending process.
In the fluctuation ending process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1310B as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S1301 to S1305 as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processing of step S1306 and subsequent steps.

After executing the processing of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines In step S1306, it is determined whether the game mode is the special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it ends the fluctuation ending process without executing the process of step S1307B and thereafter. ..
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 executes the special mode continuous lottery process in step S1307B. Specifically, in the special mode continuation lottery process, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to continue the special mode with a predetermined probability (29/30 in the present embodiment) after the game times have ended.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of continuing the special mode to 29/30 (the probability of shifting to the normal mode is 1/30), but may be larger than 29/30 or smaller than 29/30. May be. Further, for example, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of continuing the special mode when the number of game times that has been exhausted until the “big hit prize” is smaller than the predetermined number in the win/loss lottery, and the “big win” If the number of game times exhausted before becoming ``winning'' is greater than the predetermined number, the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased, and the probability of continuing the special mode depending on other game situations It may be changed.

In step S1308B, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special mode continuous lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has been won, it ends the variation ending process without executing the processes of step S1309 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has not been won, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1310B, the MPU 62 sets the normal mode command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation ending process. This normal mode command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the normal mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the normal mode command set in step S1310B to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the normal mode based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

In this way, when the special jackpot is selected and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in the win/no win lottery, the game state is the end of the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) regardless of the current game state. After that, it shifts to the special mode. The special mode is continued if the special mode continuation lottery process of step S1307B is won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, based on the result of the internal lottery (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result), the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode does not have the special mode game mode, but it may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the opening and closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of attention of the player to the game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to enter. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the lower working opening 37, the probability (about 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode is , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36, it becomes higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode. There is. According to this, since the player expects to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. Transfer the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, and the normal mode when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. Transfer the game mode to. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, the pachinko machine 10 uses the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the game state to the high frequency support mode, Although the game mode is transferred to the normal mode, the game mode may be transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation ending process is a normal mode lottery means for executing the normal mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode in the main controller 60. Function as. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won. According to this, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts from the special mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery in which the probability of continuing the special mode is set to 29/30 is not selected after the game mode is transferred to the special mode. Although the game mode has been transferred to the mode, the probability of continuing the special mode may be set to a plurality of probabilities such as 29/30 and 28/30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode result is the high frequency. It functions as the second lottery result of shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high frequency support mode even when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
And, the low frequency support mode, when the low frequency support mode result is the normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode, and when the low frequency support mode result is the high frequency support mode, the game state is changed. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a 100% higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, switches from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is transferred and the game state is transferred from the open/close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when shifting the game state from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at a timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 as in the first embodiment, and thereafter executes the processes of step S2112 and subsequent steps.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2119B and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 the type of distribution result is determined based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114B, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204B as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When determining that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2202. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode at the time of "big hit" in the win/no win lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2202 and subsequent steps, and selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, it is rendered as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Select B2. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The durations of the effects A and B2 correspond to the times when the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times in the opening and closing execution mode.

Further, based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B2, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

Here, the effect B2 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the dialogue "30 rotation chance zone" of the character. "!" to inform the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (shift to special mode) (see FIG. 30(D) and FIG. 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B2 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the character's dialogue "Enter the chance zone!" This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that the player is informed that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (transition to the special mode).

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process of step S2115 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets the open/close execution mode command including information related to the effect for open/close execution mode selected in step S2114B. The open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51, based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2119B and subsequent steps.

In step S2119B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the normal mode command is received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command is received, the MPU 92 executes the normal mode notification process based on the content of the normal mode command in step S2120B. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for notifying the player of the shift to the normal mode based on the normal mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 informs the player that the normal mode is entered. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player of the shift to the normal mode at the character's dialogue "end of chance zone".

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, the close command, the ending command, and the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game result and game state>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result and a game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal disengagement result" and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 42, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode and a special mode game mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as the game result excluding "normal disengagement result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “out-of-normal result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state and the like, the content of the game result, and The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state are different depending on the game results of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

In the "low frequency support mode result", the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. Further, in the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B2. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operation opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B2. Furthermore, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" game results.
Specifically, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

Therefore, the player confirms that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow of game balls after entering the right side variable ball entering mechanism>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right entrance (V prize).
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. 43(A) when the game ball wins the right entering ball 404 (V winning). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, in step S2202, the effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 43(B), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the line of the character, “RUSH rush!” Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 43(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number up to the high frequency support mode end reference number (100 times in FIG. 43(C)) based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B2, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 43(D), and the line of the character "Enter the chance zone!" The player is informed that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (transition to special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 43(E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is continued in the special mode if the special mode continuous lottery process in step S1307B is won, and if not, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a leftward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest left-handing to the player.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect for game play when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol rows (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4A), so that the same symbol combination ( In the present embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol string (symbol string Z2) is variably displayed in that state to generate the reach display and shift to the reach period.

After that, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 44(B), as a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in this embodiment) is a valid line. By displaying a stop on L, the result of the lottery is notified. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result" or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the line "RUSH rush!" Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number (100 times in FIG. 44(C)) up to the reference number for ending the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

If the pachinko machine 10 does not win the special mode continuous lottery process in step S1307B, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode.
Here, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has not been won, the MPU 62 sets the normal mode command in step S1310B, and the MPU 92 receives the normal mode command in step S2119B. If it is determined that the normal mode notification process is performed, the normal mode notification process is executed based on the content of the normal mode command in step S2120B. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 44(D), and the character's dialogue “end chance zone” is displayed. Then, the player is informed of the shift to the normal mode.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has been won, it does not set the normal mode command, so the MPU 102 causes the characters or characters to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The dialogue of this character is not displayed, and the player is not notified of the shift to the normal mode. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a leftward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest left-handing to the player.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, the high speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has passed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol columns (the symbol column Z1 and the symbol column Z3) on the activated line L (see FIG. 4(A)), thereby combining the same symbols. By displaying and suggesting the stop result, and by variably displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) in that state, the reach display is generated to shift to the reach period.

Then, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result on the activated line L, thereby informing the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, in step S2202, the effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the dialogue of this character, “RUSH rush!” The player is informed that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the number of remaining times (100 times in FIG. 44(C)) up to the termination reference number of the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect B2, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 44(F), and the line of the character "Enter the chance zone!" The player is informed that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (transition to special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode is continued in the special mode if the special mode continuous lottery process in step S1307B is won, and if not, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a leftward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest left-handing to the player.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects are obtained. Can play.
(13) Since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, in the win/loss lottery, when the “big hit” is set and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) regardless of the current gaming state. After the end of), it was transitioned to the special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode is continued until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are exhausted.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the special mode, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, 30 or 50 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are performed. It is different from the first embodiment in that it continues until digested.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a shift process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110C as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1102 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result"), The processing after step S1105 is executed.
First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the distribution result is determined to be the “high frequency support mode result” by the MPU 62 in step S1101 will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag when it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes having different support modes which are shifted after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode”. It has a special mode for setting the support mode to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the distribution result of the "mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result" as the game mode.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, it sets the game mode to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been exhausted. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, in step S1101, the processing (processing after step S1105) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” will be described.
When it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”) in step S1101, in step S1105, It is determined whether the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), it executes the processes in step S1102 and subsequent steps. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”. Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it sets the game number counter in step S1109C. Execute the process. The game number counter setting process will be described later in detail.

In step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the special mode flag in the RAM 64. If the special mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.

In step S1110C, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode. This special mode command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1110C to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

FIG. 46 is a view showing a flowchart of the game number counter setting process.
In the game number counter setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode when the “big hit win” or the “small win” is the high frequency support mode in the win/loss lottery.

When it is determined in step S1401 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 whether the value of the game number counter RTC is “90” or more. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it has become a “small win” in the win/loss lottery after the open/close execution mode is finished and after shifting to the high-frequency support mode and before 10 game times are exhausted.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the game number counter RTC is “90” or more, in step S1403, the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to “50”. ”Is set. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when it is determined that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode) or in step S1402. If it is determined that the value of RTC is not "90" or more, in step S1404, "30" is set to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 or 50 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 or 50 game times have been exhausted. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
Here, the information on the number of continuations of the special mode (30 times or 50 times) is included in the special mode command described above.
In addition, after executing the process of step S1107, the MPU 62 clears the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37.

In this way, if a win occurs in the win/no win lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes “high frequency support mode result”, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After that, it shifts to high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the win/win lottery, and when 100 game times are exhausted, the low frequency support mode is entered. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

Also, if a win occurs in the win/win lottery and the distribution result is “low frequency support mode result” in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode if the game mode is the special mode. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, it shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the win/win lottery, and when 100 game times are exhausted, the low frequency support mode is entered. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the win/win lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 or 50 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when the winning/winning lottery does not result in winning, that is, when the winning/winning result in the winning/winning lottery is “out of normal result”, the gaming state does not shift.

Here, the value of the game number counter RTC is included in the variation command and the special mode command described above. In addition, information regarding the game mode (information regarding whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the opening command described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, based on the result of the internal lottery (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result), the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode does not have the special mode game mode, but it may have this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the opening and closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted from the normal control state, and when the game state is shifted from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of attention of the player to the game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the entered game ball to enter. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open/close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the lower working opening 37, the probability (about 1/12.5) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode is , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36, it becomes higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode via the variable entrance execution mode. There is. According to this, since the player expects to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. Transfer the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, and the normal mode when shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. Transfer the game mode to. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, the pachinko machine 10 uses the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode when shifting the game state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the game state to the high frequency support mode, Although the game mode is transferred to the normal mode, the game mode may be transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 or 50 times in the present embodiment) are exhausted after the game mode is transferred to the special mode. Transfer the game mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is played, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game times other than this are exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. , For example, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37, when the number of "small wins" exceeds a predetermined number, the special mode is changed to the normal mode. The game mode may be shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, the game mode may be switched from the special mode to the normal mode when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is shot toward the right-handed route while staying in the special mode. According to this, in the high-frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the right-handed route, and in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the left-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode result is the high frequency. It functions as the second lottery result of shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the game state to the high frequency support mode even when the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
And, the low frequency support mode, when the low frequency support mode result is the normal mode that shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode, and when the low frequency support mode result is the high frequency support mode, the game state is changed. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, even if the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode, he/she expects to stay in the special mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a 100% higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, switches from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is transferred and the game state is transferred from the open/close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is transferred to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when shifting the game state from the opening/closing execution mode to the normal control state, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at a timing, for example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, after the game state is transferred to the high-frequency support mode, until the game state is transferred to the open/close execution mode, the number of times the game is played and the end reference number (this embodiment). Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value set to a number smaller than 100 times (90 times in the present embodiment), a special mode of 50 times advantageous to the player (advantageous side game situation) and an advantageous side The game is divided into 30 special modes (adverse game situation) that are more disadvantageous to the player than the game situation. According to this, the player pays attention to the number of times the game is played until the game state is changed to the open/close execution mode after the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the advantageous side game situation is set to the special mode of 50 times, and the disadvantage side game situation is set to the special mode of 30 times. The advantageous game situation and the disadvantage game situation may be set. In short, the advantageous game situation may be a game situation that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage game situation may be a game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantage game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60, after the game state is transferred to the high-frequency support mode, until the game state is transferred to the open/close execution mode, the number of times the game is played is smaller than the end reference number. If it is smaller than the set threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous game situation, and if it is larger, it is distributed to the disadvantage game situation. According to this, since the player shifts the game state to the high-frequency support mode, the player will pay attention to the game times up to the threshold value set to a number smaller than the end reference number, so that the pachinko machine 10 can: It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, after the game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the game is played until the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode, and the threshold value set to a number smaller than the end reference number, If it is smaller than this threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous side game situation, if it is larger, it is distributed to the disadvantage side game situation, but if it is larger than this threshold value, it is distributed to the advantage side game situation and if it is smaller Alternatively, it may be distributed to the disadvantage game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special mode is an advantageous side game situation in which the game mode is switched from the special mode to the normal mode when 50 times (predetermined number) of game times are consumed, and 30 times (less than the predetermined number of times). When the number of times of the game is exhausted, the game mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode and the disadvantageous side game situation. According to this, since the special mode of 30 times shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than 50 is exhausted, the player can compare with the special mode of 50 times. It can be a disadvantageous game situation for the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is the same as the third embodiment, and after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the main controller 60, it is a normal mode of whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode. A normal mode lottery means for executing the mode lottery may be provided, and the main controller 60 may shift the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won. In this case, the special mode may have an advantageous game situation in which the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is low and a disadvantageous game situation in which the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high.
According to this, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. In addition, the disadvantageous game situation has a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery, so that the game situation may be disadvantageous for the player as compared with the advantageous game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes of step S2112 and subsequent steps.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2117C.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, in step S2113 the type of distribution result is determined based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2114C, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in order to determine the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204C as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When determining that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the MPU 92 selects the effect A3 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2202C. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode at the time of "big hit" in the win/no win lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2202C and subsequent steps, and selects the effect A3 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, it is rendered as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Select B3. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode.
The durations of the effects A3 and B3 correspond to the times when the special winning opening 38a is opened/closed 15 times in the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, based on the selection result of the effect A3 and the effect B3, the MPU 92 performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

Here, the effect A3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect A of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect A of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the dialogue "RUSH rush!" Then, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” (shift to the normal mode) (see FIG. 30(B) and FIG. 31(C)).
On the other hand, in the effect A3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the line of the character “RUSH plunge! If you win, you'll get bonuses!" to inform the player that the game result is "high frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode), and if you win within 10 rotations, The special mode thereafter is different from the effect A of the first embodiment in that the special mode is informed that the game will be continued 50 times.

The effect B3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the dialogue "30 rotation chance zone" of the character. "!" to inform the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (shift to special mode) (see FIG. 30(D) and FIG. 31(E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the dialogue of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the special mode for the player. This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify that the shift to.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process of step S2115 and subsequent steps will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets the open/close execution mode command including information related to the effect for open/close execution mode selected in step S2114C. The open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51, based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2117C and subsequent steps.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether the special mode command is received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command is received, in step S2118C, the special mode notification process is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. Here, the special mode command includes the value of the game number counter RTC.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for notifying the player of the shift to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the shift to the special mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the character's dialogue “30 rotation The player is informed of the shift to the special mode in the "chance zone!" or "50 rotation chance zone!".

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, the close command, the ending command, and the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game result and game state>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result and a game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the “normal disengagement result” and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10 has, as shown in FIG. 49, a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as the game result excluding "normal disengagement result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “out-of-normal result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state and the like, the content of the game result, and The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state are different depending on the game results of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A3. .. In the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A3. Furthermore, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

In the "low frequency support mode result", the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B3. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower working opening 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B3. Furthermore, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the "special mode" game mode, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" game results.
Specifically, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. In addition, in the game result based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect A3. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode becomes the normal mode.

Therefore, the player confirms that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the flow of game balls after entering the right side variable ball entering mechanism>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball wins the right entrance (V prize).
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 responds to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. 50(A) when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right entrance 404 Perform the production. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, in step S2202C, the effect A3 as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the line of the character “Rush rush! 10 revolutions”. "If you win within 10 minutes, you will get bonuses!" to inform the player that the game result is "high frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode) and win within 10 rotations. For example, the special mode thereafter informs that the game will be continued 50 times until it is exhausted.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 50(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number up to the high-frequency support mode end reference number (100 times in FIG. 50(C)) based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the game number counter RTC is not "90" or more (see FIG. 28A), it is provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. The value of the game number counter RTC is set to "30", and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command is received, in step S2118C, the special mode notification process is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. The player is informed of the shift to the special mode in the "30 chance zone!", and the special mode is informed that the game will continue until 30 game times are exhausted.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the number of remaining times (30 times in FIG. 50(E)) up to the reference number for ending the special mode, based on the content of the command for variation. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

<Entering the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect for game play in the case where a game ball is won in the lower operation opening triggered by winning in the through gate in the high frequency support mode.
In addition, the high frequency support mode becomes "big hit prize" or "small win" in the win/loss lottery, and if the result is distributed to the "high frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, or if you are in the special mode In the lottery, the “big hit” is selected, and in the sorting lottery, the result is distributed to the “low frequency support mode result”. Further, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the win/no win result is “small win”.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. The transition to the high speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number (95 times in FIG. 51(A)) up to the reference number for ending the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. Display on the upper left of screen G.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4(B)), as shown in FIG. 51(A). By displaying the same combination of symbols (for example, "A") and suggesting a stop result, the remaining symbol string (symbol string Z2) is variably displayed in that state to generate the reach display. Enter the reach period.

Then, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stop-displays a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character (for example, “AAA”) on the activated line L as a stop result, and thereby the result of the win/no win lottery. Is notified (see FIG. 28(B)).

After the combination of symbols having the same letter is stopped and displayed on the activated line L by the MPU 102, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c to set the blade member 401a to the open state ( See FIG. 28C).
In addition, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the character to be displayed on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player of the character's dialogue so that the character is right-handed.

Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode received from the MPU 92.
In the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102, in the variable ball entry execution mode, based on the V winning success command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance 404. The effect corresponding to the success of the V winning is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character “V” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to notify the player that the game ball has won the right entrance 404 (V prize). (See FIG. 28D).
In addition, in the effect for the variable winning execution mode, the MPU 102 wins the V winning based on the V winning failure command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball does not win the right winning opening 404 (V winning). Perform the production corresponding to the failure. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the word “sorry” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball has not won (V prize) in the right entrance 404. The notification is made (see FIG. 28E).

In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 executes the effect corresponding to the success of the V entry when the game ball is won (V entry) in the right entry port 404. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, in step S2202C, the effect A3 as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 51(B), the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and at the same time, the line of the character "RUSH rush! If you win within 10 minutes, you will be notified that the game result is "high frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode) and if you win within 10 rotations. , The special mode thereafter informs that the game will be continued 50 times.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 51(C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the number of remaining times (100 times in FIG. 51(C)) up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode, based on the content of the variation command. It is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to suggest the player to hit the right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. When it is done (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the game number counter RTC is equal to or greater than "90" (see FIG. 51(A)), it is provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. "50" is set to the value of the game number counter RTC, and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that the special mode command is received, in step S2118C, the special mode notification process is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to display a character after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. The player is informed of the shift to the special mode in the "50-turn chance zone!", and the special mode is informed that the game will continue until 50 game times are exhausted.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 51(E). In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 50 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number (50 times in FIG. 51(E)) up to the reference number for ending the special mode, based on the content of the variation command. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit left.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining times up to the reference number of times of ending the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects are obtained. Can play.
(14) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 or 50 game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. We will pay attention to the number of times digested. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(15) The main control device 60 is set to a number smaller than the number of times of completion of game play and the number of times of completion of the game until the game state is transferred to the open/close execution mode after the game state is transferred to the high-frequency support mode. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, the game is divided into 50 special modes which are advantageous to the player and 30 special modes which are more disadvantageous to the player than the 50 special modes. After shifting the game state to the support mode, attention is paid to the number of times the game times are exhausted until the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(16) The main controller 60 is set to a number smaller than the number of times the game is played and the number of times the game is completed until the game state is transferred to the open/close execution mode after the game state is transferred to the high-frequency support mode. The threshold value is compared, and if it is smaller than this threshold value, it is distributed to the special mode 50 times. Therefore, after the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode, the player is set to a number smaller than the end reference number. Attention will be paid to the game times up to the threshold value. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(17) The special mode of 30 times shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than 50 is exhausted, so it is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the special mode of 50 times. It can be a different game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Modifications of Embodiments]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapse after the open/close door 38b is set to the open state, or a game to the special winning opening 38a. When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number of eight. Therefore, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is opened and closed by setting the opening/closing door 38b to an open state and then reaching a predetermined upper limit number of total winning numbers of game balls into the special winning opening 38a. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 includes an end trigger opening that sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state when a game ball enters, and when the predetermined time elapses, this end It may be configured to allow a ball to enter the opportunity opening.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the open/close door 38b is closed again after the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b by opening the open/close door 38b and then opening the open/close door 38b after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the winning at the special winning opening 38a occurs. The closed state may be set again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b in the open state and then sets the open/close door 38b in the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the open/close door 38b again after setting the open/close door 38b in the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has one type of open/close execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 had an open/close execution mode in which a round game was executed 15 times with an upper limit duration. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening/closing execution mode different from the above regarding the aspect of the upper limit duration time and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may have a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set by changing the mode of the upper limit duration time. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of open/close execution modes by differentiating. Furthermore, the aspect of the upper limit duration may be set so that the player sees the same aspect but the exact upper limit duration is different.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without being associated with the game result, and selected by a lottery or the like from the plurality of types of effects. The selection rate may be set differently depending on the game result.
(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, and uses the hit type counter C2 in the lottery for the jackpot type in the jackpot occurrence. On the other hand, when the big hit occurs, the MPU 62 may use the random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big hit. In this case, the hit type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by setting the support mode, but sets a gaming state other than these. By doing so, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a gaming state that is unfavorable for the player by changing the number of game times for continuing the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. ..

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display holding area Ra and stores the hold information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result displaying portion. By storing the holding information on the upper working port 36 and the holding information on the lower working port 37, the holding information for the upper working port 36 is stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the hold information related to the lower working port 37 together.
(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the pending information on the lower working port 37 for digesting game times regardless of whether or not there is pending information on the upper working port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the holding information related to the upper working port 36 and the holding information related to the lower working port 37 for the game times to be consumed in the winning order of the respective holding information.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command resulting from analysis of the command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 is controlled by the following. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of the command to the voice emission control device 90, thereby performing the voice emission control. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in each of the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. ..
(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one control device of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 51 causes the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to be periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the pattern, the effect for game use is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for playing the game is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game play by operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 51 in combination. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game play by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 51 in combination. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game play by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 51.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes the internal lottery (win/win lottery and distribution lottery) based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 51 executes the variable display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37 as the result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the picture and displays the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery, or by displaying the stop result at random, The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 51 causes the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to be periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the pattern, the effect for game use is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 51 may execute the game use effect on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (a symbol) that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 51 has a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, a symbol clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in this predetermined area may or may not be variably displayed during the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may be a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for the player to identify, or a combination thereof. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters or colors or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify, and patterns that are similar to each other, or combinations thereof, even if they are not. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, looks at the symbol display device 51 without looking at the main display unit 45 at the end of the game time, and is the same as in the case of winning the jackpot occurrence lottery. It is possible to simply confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior is being performed.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the game machine is configured so that the player can output an optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and the information of the optical code is provided on a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at, and accessing the website. In addition, the game machine is configured to receive the information of the web server by inputting the password issued by the player accessing the website to the game machine by operating the buttons etc. provided on the game machine. You may.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments will be described below. Incidentally, among the features of the present invention group, the corresponding configurations in the respective embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group Modifications, improvements, etc. within a range where the object can be achieved, and combinations of the respective characteristics are included in the characteristics of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
The game state is
A first game state having a normal mode and a special mode game mode (low frequency support mode),
A second game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, one of the first game state and the second game state. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming state is shifted to, and in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the characteristic A1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game state. The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so the player is in the first game state. Even when the game state is shifted to, the player expects to stay in the special mode and plays the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means changes from a normal control state to a specific control state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. It is characterized in that when the game state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is transferred to one of the first game state and the second game state. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means changes the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering section than the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability than the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of entering the second start entering ball portion, resulting in a more advantageous game state for a player than in the first game state.

According to the characteristic A3 of the present invention group, the first game state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering portion than the second starting ball entering portion, and the second game state is the first starting ball. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance section is higher than that of the entering section, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the first starting entrance section in the first gaming state, In the game state, a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Features A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance section and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means transitions the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine having a higher probability than shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at that time.

According to the characteristic A4 of the present invention group, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the first starting ball entering section. It is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic A5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the characteristic A6 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode, and then the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state shifting means, a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the characteristic A8 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature group A of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

However, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, the player has to play in the first game state, which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be immediately stopped.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
The game state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
A second game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The result of the internal lottery is
A first lottery result (low frequency support mode result) for shifting the game state to either the first game state or the second game state,
A gaming machine comprising: a second lottery result (high frequency support mode result) for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the result of the internal lottery is the first lottery result of shifting the game state to either the first game state or the second game state, and the game to the second game state. Since the second lottery result for changing the state is provided, the gaming machine can shift the game state to the second game state even when the first lottery result is obtained. It is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The first game state,
A normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the first game state when the first lottery result is obtained,
A gaming machine having a special mode for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the first game state becomes the first lottery result and the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the first game state when the first lottery result is obtained. In this case, since the player has a special mode for shifting the game state to the second game state, the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the first game state. Then you will play. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means changes from a normal control state to a specific control state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. It is characterized in that when the game state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is transferred to one of the first game state and the second game state. Amusement machine.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means sets the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering section than the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability than the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of entering the second start entering ball portion, resulting in a more advantageous game state for a player than in the first game state.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering portion than the second starting ball entering portion, and the second gaming state has the first starting ball. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance section is higher than that of the entering section, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the first starting entrance section in the first gaming state, In the game state, a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B4 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance section and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means transitions the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine having a higher probability than shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at that time.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the first starting ball entering section. It is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B5 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B5 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B7 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are exhausted. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B7 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state shift means, a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether to shift the game state to the normal mode is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

However, since the transition destinations of the first game state and the second game state are respectively associated with the results of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
The game state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
A second game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The first game state,
Normal mode,
With a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than the normal mode,
The gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state, and shifts the gaming mode to the second gaming state when the gaming mode shifts to the normal mode. A game machine characterized by shifting the game mode to.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode, and the game state shifting means is: When the game state is changed to the first game state, the game mode is changed to the special mode, and when the game state is changed to the second game state, the game mode is changed to the normal mode. , Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode and plays the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means changes from a normal control state to a specific control state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. It is characterized in that when the game state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is transferred to one of the first game state and the second game state. Amusement machine.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means sets the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering section than the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability than the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of entering the second start entering ball portion, resulting in a more advantageous game state for a player than in the first game state.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the first game state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering portion than the second starting ball entering portion, and the second game state is the first starting ball. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance section is higher than that of the entering section, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the first starting entrance section in the first gaming state, In the game state, a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance section and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means transitions the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine having a higher probability than shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at that time.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the first starting ball entering section. It is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are exhausted. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state shifting means, a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the characteristic C8 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

However, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, the player has to play in the first game state, which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be immediately stopped.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
The game state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
A second game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The first game state,
Normal mode,
With a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than the normal mode,
The game state transition means is provided with a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not the game mode is transferred to the normal mode after the game mode is transferred to the special mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the first game state includes the normal mode and the special mode in which the probability of shifting to the game state advantageous to the player is higher than the normal mode, so that the player is , Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode and plays the game. Then, the game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means changes from a normal control state to a specific control state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. It is characterized in that when the game state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is transferred to one of the first game state and the second game state. Amusement machine.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means changes the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering section than the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability than the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of entering the second start entering ball portion, resulting in a more advantageous game state for a player than in the first game state.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering portion than the second starting ball entering portion, and the second gaming state is the first starting ball. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance section is higher than that of the entering section, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the first starting entrance section in the first gaming state, In the game state, a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance section and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means transitions the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine having a higher probability than shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at that time.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the first starting ball entering section. It is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

However, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, the player has to play in the first game state, which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be immediately stopped.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
The game state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
A second game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the first game state is provided until the end reference number of game times are exhausted,
The game state transition means changes from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. After the state is transferred, after the game state is transferred to the second game state, the number of times the game has been played until the game state is transferred to the specific control state and the number of times smaller than the end reference number are set. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, the advantageous side game situation advantageous for the player (50 special modes) and the disadvantage side game situation more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous side game situation (30 special modes) ) A gaming machine characterized by being sorted into and.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means, after the game state is shifted to the second game state, until the game state is shifted to the specific control state, the number of times the game is played and the end reference number of times. Based on the result of comparison with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times, the game is divided into an advantageous-side game situation that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantage-side game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous-side game situation. The person pays attention to the number of times the game times are exhausted after the game state is transferred to the second game state and before the game state is transferred to the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means sets the number of times of playing the game times until the game state transitions to the specific control state after the game state transitions to the second game state and a number smaller than the end reference number. A gaming machine characterized by comparing with a threshold value that is set, and if it is smaller than the threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is larger, it is distributed to the disadvantage side game situation.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, after the game state is transferred to the second game state, the number of times the game is played until the game state is transferred to the specific control state, and the end reference number of times. Compared with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times, and if smaller than this threshold value, the game is distributed to the advantageous-side game situation. Therefore, after the player shifts the game state to the second game state, the end reference number of times Attention will be paid to game times up to a threshold value set to a smaller number. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The first game state,
Normal mode,
With a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than the normal mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when shifting the gaming state from the specific control state to the normal control state.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the first game state includes the normal mode and the special mode in which the probability of shifting to the game state advantageous to the player is higher than the normal mode, so that the player is , Even when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the player expects to stay in the special mode and plays the game. Then, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, so the player shifts to the special mode? We will pay attention to whether or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means, after transitioning the game mode to the special mode, transitions the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted,
The special mode is
The advantageous side game situation of shifting the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted,
A gaming machine having the above-mentioned disadvantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than a predetermined number is exhausted.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are exhausted. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. In addition, the disadvantaged side game situation shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than a predetermined number is exhausted, so that the disadvantageous game situation for the player compared to the advantageous side game situation. Can be Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state shifting means, a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode is provided,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won,
The special mode is
With the advantageous side game situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by having the above-mentioned disadvantageous side game situation in which there is a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. In addition, the disadvantageous game situation has a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery, so that it can be a disadvantageous game situation for the player as compared with the advantageous game situation. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E3 to E5 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E3 to E5 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, the game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The game state shifting means shifts the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means changes the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering section than the second starting ball entering section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability than the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of entering the second start entering ball portion, resulting in a more advantageous game state for a player than in the first game state.

According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entering portion than the second starting ball entering portion, and the second gaming state has the first starting ball. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance section is higher than that of the entering section, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the first starting entrance section in the first gaming state, In the game state, a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E9 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance section and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance section. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40),
The game state transition means transitions the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering section. A gaming machine having a higher probability than shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at that time.

According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the first starting ball entering section. It is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

However, the second game state continues until the end reference number of game times are exhausted, and the gaming machine is based on the result of the internal lottery regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot lottery in the second game state. Since the game state is changed, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable ball entry mechanism 40) that allows the game ball to enter is provided.
The game state is
A first time saving state (high frequency support mode) in which it is easy to enter the variable ball entering mechanism;
A second time saving state (a low frequency support mode of a special mode) in which it is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry mechanism as compared with the first time saving state,
The gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism. ..

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the gaming state is less likely to enter the variable ball entry mechanism than the first time saving state where the variable ball entry mechanism is easier to enter and the first time saving state. Since the second time saving state is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance part and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance part.
The variable ball entry mechanism allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the player shoots the game ball toward the second path in the first time-saving state, and the game ball toward the first path in the second time-saving state. Will be fired. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2 of the present invention group,
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a normal mode and a game mode of the second time saving state as a special mode,
A second game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, one of the first game state and the second game state. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming state is shifted to, and in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game state. The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so the player is in the first game state. Even when the game state is shifted to, the player expects to stay in the special mode and plays the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and the specific control is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming state is shifted from the state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means sets the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is transferred from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she stays in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are exhausted. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state shifting means, a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

Further, as a kind of such a gaming machine, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, a game provided with a variable ball entry mechanism capable of entering the game ball. The machine is known.
This gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting entry means. However, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state is provided when the game ball enters the variable ball mechanism.
Then, the high frequency support mode is in a more advantageous state for the player than in the first game state because it is easy to enter the variable ball entry mechanism.

However, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, the player has to play in the first game state, which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be immediately stopped.

<Feature G group>
Features G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a starting ball entering means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state based on a result of the internal lottery. ), and
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entry portion (upper working opening 36),
A second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion,
The game area is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section and which does not easily enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section,
And a second path (right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting entrance part and which does not easily enter the first starting entrance part.
The game state is
By firing a game ball toward the second path, a first time-saving state (high frequency support mode), which is a situation advantageous for the player,
By firing a game ball toward the second path, a second time-saving state (a low-frequency support mode of a special mode) that is in a situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-saving state is created. Prepare,
The gaming machine is
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entering mechanism (right side variable) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. Equipped with a ball entry mechanism 40),
The gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism. ..

According to the feature G1 of the group of the present invention, the gaming state is directed toward the second route and the first time saving state, which is a situation advantageous for the player by shooting the game ball toward the second route. When the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry mechanism, it is provided with a second time saving state which is a disadvantageous situation for the player as compared with the first time saving state by firing the game ball with It is possible to diversify the types of gaming states that can shift the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means ends the second time saving state when a game ball is shot toward the second path during the stay in the second time saving state. ..

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means ends the second time saving state when the game ball is launched toward the second path during the stay in the second time saving state. , The player shoots a game ball toward the second path in the first time saving state, and shoots a game ball toward the first path in the second time saving state. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Features G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2 of the present invention group,
The game state is
A first game state (low frequency support mode) having a normal mode and a game mode of the second time saving state as a special mode,
A second game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, one of the first game state and the second game state. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming state is shifted to, and in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game state. The game state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so the player is in the first game state. Even when the game state is changed to, the player expects to stay in the special mode and plays the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and the specific control is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming state is shifted from the state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means changes the game state to either the first game state or the second game state when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the shift is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he/she is staying in the special mode when shifting to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to one of the normal mode and the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery to determine whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode (transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
The game state shift means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode.

According to the feature G7 of the group of the present invention, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are exhausted. The player pays attention to the number of times the game is played. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state shifting means, a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

According to the characteristic G8 of the present invention group, the game state shifting means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature group G of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down in the game area, and executing an internal lottery for entering the game ball A gaming machine including and is known.
The game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, and shifts the game state based on the result of this internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high frequency support mode and plays the game.

Further, as a kind of such a gaming machine, based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means, a game provided with a variable ball entry mechanism capable of entering the game ball. The machine is known.
This gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting entry means. However, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state is provided when the game ball enters the variable ball mechanism.
Then, the high frequency support mode is in a more advantageous state for the player than in the first game state because it is easy to enter the variable ball entry mechanism.

However, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, the player has to play in the first game state, which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be immediately stopped.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10...Pachinko machine, 35...General winning opening, 36...Upper working opening, 37...Lower working opening, 38...Variable winning device, 38a...Large winning opening, 38b...Opening/closing door, 38c...Variable winning driving section, 39...Out Mouth, 40... Right variable ball entry mechanism, 51... Symbol display device, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90... Audio emission control device, 92... MPU, 100... Display control device, 102... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a starting ball entering means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine provided with a state shifting means capable of shifting a state in the game based on a result of the internal lottery,
The state is
A first state having a normal mode and a special mode;
A second state that is more advantageous to the player than the first state,
The state transition means is a means for transitioning to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting entry means, and the first In the normal mode of the state and the second state, the means for shifting to one of the first state and the second state based on the result of the internal lottery, and the special mode of the first state And a means for shifting to the second state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

Images